










m 

m 


n.NA P L^ T I I UI 

^ 4 — 


Shelf - t 


COPYRIGHT' DEPOSIT. 


% 


l\ 


LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 




as 

m 












> 











































































































































































































































































































. 
























































































♦ 


















































































































LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 
































































Photo by Phelps, New Haven, Ct., 1907. 

Rev. ALBERT AUGUSTUS LATHBURY 

Member of the New York East Conference Methodist Episcopal Church 








LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


BY 


ALBERT A. LATHBURY 

u 

Member of the American Institute for Scientific Research 


SECOND EDITION 



NEW YORK 

THE BAKER & TAYLOR COMPANY 
Publisher s Agents 
33 East Seventeenth Street 
1908 





















Q 




i 


1 LIBRARY *t CONGRESS 

Ontwotjv iitteivetf 

|SEPt|^ iyu« 

I i - 

CLA 3 7 C Zt>t C ‘** 

COPY A. 


Copyright, 1902-1908 


ALBERT A. LATHBURY 


New York 
Kay Printing House 
66-68 Centre St. 






LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 

INTRODUCTION TO THE SECOND 
EDITION. 

THE SPEAKING SPIRIT 

“Howbeit when he the Spirit of truth is come, he 
will guide you into all truth; for he shall not speak 
of himself; but whatsoever he shall hear, that shall 
he speak, and he will show you things to come ”— 
John, 16:13. 

In the winter of 1896 I began to live in a new 
world. I had been considering the privileges and 
possibilities of the pentecostal gift known as “The 
Promise of the Father.” 1 I was convinced that 
there was more in this endowment than had been 
generally understood and accepted. I had found 
the glowing love, the intense energy, the purity 

1 Acts 1:4- 


1 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


and power. I saw also that the promise included 
the Comforter or Helper in the memory: “He shall 
bring all things to your remembrance.” 2 I recog¬ 
nized him in my memory and found immediately 
a great change. I did not need notes while address¬ 
ing an audience. I had been compelled to use them 
for many years. I had help at the right instant, 
so that I did not omit or fail in the effort to 
recollect. 

I then received the Spirit as a guide in all the 
affairs of life. I resolved to test the promise, “He 
shall guide you into all truth,” by exploring its 
utmost possibilities and limitations. I began with 
little things in which evidence that I was right or 
had failed could be easily noticed. When there was 
doubt or perplexity I waited for clearer light and 
asked for help to meet conditions that had been 
overlooked. It came. I saw that knowledge in 
this realm was slowly revealed, that I must be bold 
but cautious and discriminating. I could not be 
used without thoughtful effort or as a passive instru¬ 
ment. I must do my part or there would be con¬ 
fusion and delay in getting the divine responses. 

’John 14:26. 
ii 



THE SPEAKING SPIRIT 


These responses came as impressions and sugges¬ 
tions, and were well understood. 

One memorable day something was suggested 
that seemed unreasonable and contrary to that which 
should be expected from a divine source. I hesi¬ 
tated. Was this right? Was it from the Holy 
Spirit? For a while I was in doubt, when sud¬ 
denly these words were spoken distinctly within 
my mind: - “I am the Spirit of Jesus.” I was sur¬ 
prised. Heretofore I had got impressions and sug¬ 
gestions, but this was a silent verbal communication. 
I resolved to test this voice. I said, reverently, 
“Are you the Divine Spirit?” He responded, “I 
am.” I was then impressed with the idea that I 
should prove him by acting as he had directed. I 
acted promptly and was fully satisfied with the 
result. It was a great victory. I had been carried 
through something that I did not at first under¬ 
stand but saw clearly afterward. This was some¬ 
thing new to me. I had heard the Holy Spirit 
speak . Could it be possible? If so, how amazing; 
how valuable was my discovery. Could I now 
inquire of the Lord as men did in ancient times 
and get his thoughts in more definite form? It 
iii 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


seemed to me that I had been greatly favored and 
should be very careful—I should, in a deeper sense, 
become a living sacrifice holy and acceptable unto 
God. I must be crucified with Christ and yet live; 
for I had a great privilege and an important work 
before me. 

But was this message genuine and authentic, or 
had I been deceived? Was it imaginary or had 
it arisen from something within myself that I did 
not perceive? Did it emanate from an evil source 
without? Could not the divine spirit be simulated 
or imitated? I determined to know the truth at 
any cost. I would spend a lifetime in the effort 
if necessary. Then came a terrible struggle, for 
I perceived that the spiritual world was breaking 
in upon me. I heard other voices, some good appar¬ 
ently, and some evil in their origin. I began to 
realize that the invisible states are not separated 
from our world by distance. 

The test was severe ind thorough, for I was 
left to distinguish the voice of the Spirit from the 
voices of others. There was a persistent effort on 
the part of many who were opposed and tried 
for a long time to create confusion and uncer- 


IV 


THE SPEAKING SPIRIT 


tainty. The struggle was hard. It was almost 
too much for me at first, but I did not flinch. I 
determined to hold firmly until my environment 
became clearer. I was like a child in this new 
world and made some mistakes. I felt that the 
Holy Spirit was in sympathy with me. His patience 
was obvious. I saw that he wanted me to know 
more about the state of the wicked after death 
and to get glimpses of heaven. This was trying 
work. But I was wonderfully sustained and entered 
into a very close relation with him. I was in sym¬ 
pathy with the Spirit, believing that he had been 
misunderstood and resisted for many centuries. I 
certainly would understand him. I would not be 
“disobedient unto the heavenly vision,” though I 
should walk through the valley of the shadow of 
death. 

I fully believed that I could be saved from the 
error and fanaticism that had made his work so 
difficult in former times, and even in our day. 
For I thought, were we not living in an age when 
divine guidance in an explicit sense was regarded 
as unsafe? Was it not in many instances taught 
by those who were not remarkable for discretion 


v 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


or mental soundness? And yet when free from 
error and doubt, what doctrine so precious, what 
privilege so great? 

After a long and tedious conflict with subtle 
invisible foes, I began to act by faith, and was 
able to exclude all simulations and interpolations 
while listening for the voice divine. I then began 
to study profoundly my own inner being or sub¬ 
conscious personality, a part of our nature about 
which so little is known or can be known unless 
we hold an iron scepter over our faculties and 
depend exclusively upon divine illumination. We 
can then see the difference between what is in us 
and what comes to us from without. After this I 
spent years in observing and investigating the 
various phases of psychical phenomena that have 
been associated with the spiritual and occult until 
they were well understood. 

I saw at last that I was ready for expression, 
and should write a book on the mysteries of nature 
and the life beyond death. I had been looking into 
the great problem of evil. I had studied angelology 
under divine tuition. I knew God in a way that 
was wonderful to me. The obscure symbols, bold 
vi 


THE SPEAKING SPIRIT 


figures and dark sayings of the Bible had been 
illuminated and interpreted by the Spirit. Things 
were very clear that I had never expected to know 
in this life. Many were anxious to look into these 
things. I believed that clearer light was for them, 
and that it would satisfy their longings and con¬ 
firm their belief in immortality, so I began to write. 

Three years were occupied in writing “Life in 
Two Worlds, 5 ’ and when the twelve chapters were 
finished they were placed in the hands of eminent 
specialists for review and criticism before going to 
press. This helped me to make the book clearer 
and more easily understood by the average reader, 
but did not change the sense. Nevertheless, it is 
a volume that must be read slowly and thought¬ 
fully to get the best results. 

Albert A. Lathbury. 


vii 


January ist, 1908. 












■ 






' ■ 

















































1 




























































CONTENTS 


PAGE 

I. Mysteries of Nature and the 



Invisible World 

• 

• 

1 

II. 

Immortality 

. 

. 

16 

III. 

Fire* . 

. 

. 

28 

IV. 

Light and Darkness . 

. 

. 

38 

V. 

Where is the Spiritual 

World ? 

4 7 

VI. 

Angels. 

. 

. 

74 


VII. Expression in the Spiritual World 97 


VIII. Translation and Transfiguration 123 
IX. The End of the World . . .148 

X. Hell and Mercy . . . .188 

XI. Depths and Heights . . .234 

XII. Psychic Phenomena and the Other 

World.285 


Index 


m 























I 

MYSTERIES OF NATURE AND THE 
INVISIBLE WORLD 

The future life is so near us, and so closely 
connected with our noblest aspirations, that it cannot 
be ignored. It has been the theme of poets and 
philosophers from the dawn of history. 

In the ruins of great cities, half buried in the 
accumulations of ages, we may discern the outlines 
of the temple, with its broken columns and mag¬ 
nificent facade, revealing the hopes and ambitions 
of those whose longings for immortality found 
expression in enduring forms of beauty. 

The prevailing religions of the world are not to 
be condemned, because error is associated with 
them. They were not evil in their origin, but have 
been perverted through ignorance and unworthy 
teachers. In the sands of mythology and the fabu¬ 
lous traditions of antiquity, we may discover the 
gold of heavenly desire. The costly oblation, 


i 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


where clouds of ambrosial incense arose with orisons 
of ministering priests ascribing honor and wisdom 
to invisible divinities, disclosed the efforts of men 
seeking recognition by that Heaven, whose interests 
they felt were ever with human beings. 

When the decay of nations has unveiled the errors 
that enthralled them, the progress of civilization is 
more rapid. Out of the dead past wisdom is gath¬ 
ered for new empires and mighty republics. The 
crude science of former times becomes obsolete, and 
is relegated to the realm of romance and song. 

After numberless centuries of endogenous growth, 
the world is moving outward in rapid waves of 
emigration and occupation, that will cover the habit¬ 
able globe. The star of empire has reached its 
westward limit; but we are growing northward and 
southward, while the dormant nations of the distant 
East are feeling the pulsations of new life from 
foreign shores. 

When we consider the abundant provision for 
dense populations in new countries and vast regions 
thinly inhabited by barbarous or nomadic races in 
sunny climes where rich lands are waiting for devel¬ 
opment, and inexhaustible stores of mineral and 
marine wealth are reserved for future generations, 

See reference to illustration, “The Great Pyramid,” p. 16. 

2 



MYSTERIES OF NATURE 


it is evident that our earth is young. The world 
grows old and dies; but the planet, like the immortal 
Phoenix, rises from the ashes of its fires, moving 
steadily forward on its long journey through inter¬ 
stellar space, while from its prolific bosom myriad 
forms of life are constantly springing. 

Other planets and the immense sidereal systems 
beyond are interesting as we consider their distance 
and magnitude. But the question—“are they inhab¬ 
ited by intelligent beings ?”—cannot be dismissed. 
To conclude that they are not, is to suppose that 
the Universe is a sublime farce. 

Those stupendous suns pouring out oceans of 
precious light and heat do not glare on dead worlds 
revolving around them in stately procession. Nor 
do they spend their energy in empty space, or burn 
for the production of vegetation and animals only, 
which means a howling wilderness. An extensive 
plant costing millions, with colossal mechanism in 
perpetual motion, might excite admiration and 
wonder. If, however, it accomplished nothing, wc 
should feel that its builder had not understood his 
plan, or had failed in his effort. 

The eternity of God is incomprehensible ; but the 
fact is evident. Nothing produces nothing. There- 


3 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


fore His existence is without beginning . 1 But all 
animate and inanimate nature affords evidences of 
genesis and development, and its relation to a source 
of power and wisdom far superior to all that is 
human. 

As traces of evolution are found, philosophical 
inquiry has led to theories of production. It is 
supposed that cosmic substance—attenuated nebulae 
—acting with natural forces, formed the earth and 
the celestial bodies. Plausible and interesting as 
this conclusion may appear, it fails to account for 
the original matter, as well as the forces. 

Biology reveals the simple elements in which 
organic life begins. But the affinities and combina¬ 
tions, together with the ability to absorb and assim¬ 
ilate extraneous materials, to develop form, color, 
motion, instinct or idea, which these ultimate ele¬ 
ments possess, cannot be analyzed. The lowest 
type of vegetable or animal existence is the product 
of mysterious changes, which are found to be 
complex and unintelligible as they are studied. 

The formation of the earth is more easily under¬ 
stood when we perceive that it is a natural growth. 

1 The Father had no beginning; for there was nothing 
from which he could originate. 

4 



MYSTERIES OF NATURE 


In the vast fields of the Universe there is abun¬ 
dant material, rich in forces, and capable of 
producing every variety of celestial sphere, from a 
diminutive satellite to an immense sun. Each orb, 
in its development, conformed to the law of its kind 
without deviation, adjusting itself to its position in 
the system to which it belongs, passing through all 
stages of progress from the embryo to maturity. 
As a tiny seed in a favorable spot expands, pushing 
its roots downward and its stem upward until it 
becomes a gigantic tree, so a central sun, with its 
retinue of worlds, after inconceivable ages, reaches 
the period of efflorescence. Volumes of light and 
heat are poured forth upon the planets. An atmos¬ 
phere appears on each ponderous globe, its crown¬ 
ing glory like the color and fragrance of the rose. 
Ten thousand times ten thousand new creations 
make that which “was without form and void” a 
paradise. 

Nothing is so fruitful as a world. It is the 
mother of everything that lives upon it, even 
immortal man. Unlike its productions, it is per¬ 
manent. It is among the foundations of heaven. 
It is a stone in the palace of God. It may be deso¬ 
late for a while; but it cannot die. After a wintry 


5 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


transition, spring will come again. There is no 
burial ground for a dead world . 2 

The vast unbounded expanse wherein the stars 
appear, and through which our world is moving 
rapidly, is not a creation. Apart from the matter 
it contains, it is simply space. It is nothing. And 
yet its value cannot be estimated. It is the environ¬ 
ment of the Universe, a mighty shoreless, silent 
ocean of vacuity, without bottom or top. The 
abyss of eternity; but the arena of ceaseless activity 
and multitudinous life. 

Cosmic matter in some form must have existed 
always. It could not be produced from nothing, 
or derived from the Deity, as Fie is a being abso¬ 
lutely spiritual, and mind cannot generate material 
substance from itself. The Universe is not made 
out of God; but created by Him. The forces of 
nature as properties of matter or expressions of 
supreme energy, are eternal. 

Creation implies design, control of forces, forma¬ 
tion, and ability to impart all kinds of life with 
peculiarities of growth, form, color, motion, tend- 


3 Some have understood that the moon is a dead world; 
but this view is theoretical. 


6 



MYSTERIES OF NATURE 


ency, instinct or intelligence. The Universe is a 
divine conception materialized. 

The beginning of organic life is a great mystery. 
The world was planted without seeds. Animals 
and man appeared before parental reproduction was 
established. A deviation from known laws must 
have occurred. 

The possibilities of nature, touched with super¬ 
nal wisdom, are unlimited. The microscope reveals 
the infinitesimal germ or nucleus with its complex 
structure rapidly developing. It can be resolved 
into elements. The combination can be imitated. 
The characteristics may be familiar; but the subtle 
spring of energy, the vital principle, is still hidden, 
and cannot be defined until we see that it is a thought 
endued with power to organize itself and become 
a tangible form. 

To distinguish clearly between the animal and 
vegetable kingdoms is sometimes difficult. There 
are carnivorous plants that capture and consume 
their food, and animals in the depths of the sea that 
vegetate and bloom like flowers. The common 
origin of these two great divisions is noticed in 
Hebrew symbolism, as “The dust of the ground .” 3 


8 Gen. ii. 7. 
7 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


It is easy to see how the earth was clothed with 
verdure in bewildering varieties, springing from 
germinal points at the time of creation. But some 
animals required a different environment. They 
must have had nourishment and protection while 
in embryo and after birth, till they were able to 
care for themselves. Such subsistence and safety 
could have been afforded by vegeto-animal organ¬ 
isms until independent existence was established. 
These temporary structures, having served their pur¬ 
pose, would then sink into desuetude and mingle with 
the earth. Thus sentient beings could have been 
generated, indigenous to the locality. History could 
give us no record of such a process, unless it were 
preserved in the archives of eternity and obtained 
by revelation; but we have the analogies of nature. 

The desire for unlimited existence is very strong 
in human beings. Animals are without the percep¬ 
tion of duration which makes time so valuable 
to us. They cannot know the annals of the past, 
or the possibilities of the future. Satisfied with the 
supply of their needs, they live unconscious of many 
things that bring anxiety to us. If immortality 
were given to them, they could not appreciate it, 
or even realize the fact. 


8 


MYSTERIES OF NATURE 


If we could remain forever in the corporeal form, 
without the disadvantages which it involves, it 
would be the ideal life. Nothing is more desirable 
than the prospect of never-ending years, when 
success and happiness crown our efforts. Progres¬ 
sive youth, merging into glorious maturity, with 
no danger of decline or accident, would make an 
earthly paradise. Nature is so congenial, and the 
ties that bind us to the present are so tender, that 
we would defer indefinitely our entrance to an 
invisible and unknown state beyond, unless its 
superiority were shown by special illumination. 

The mystic tree of the Adamic age was not the 
emblem of physical immortality. There are reasons 
for believing that perpetual life in a material body 
is impossible, or worse than death. The present 
rate of increase in numbers would, in a few cen¬ 
turies, bring abnormal conditions. The earth would 
be crowded from the equator to the frozen zones. 
Agricultural pursuits abandoned, and with the neces¬ 
sities and comforts of life rapidly disappearing, men 
would fight for room and sigh for release. 

If the globe were larger and the increase of pop¬ 
ulation restricted, evils would still exist which 
could not be remedied without the extinction of 


9 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


physical life. No natural body can be strong enough 
to resist mutilation, disintegration, or change from 
solid to liquid or aeriform. Harm might come 
from casualty or evil persons. So long as men in 
this life are capable of inflicting injury of any kind 
it may occur. And if they were incapable of it, 
goodness would be only a name, without signifi¬ 
cance. 

The distinguishing characteristic of rational 
beings is knowledge of good and evil, with ability 
to choose the best or the worst for themselves. 
Without this, merit would be unknown and men 
nothing but intelligent animals. 

The privileges of life in heaven are associated 
with a spiritual body. It is substantial and yet 
imponderable, with power to appear or disappear, 
to overcome distance with the swiftness of thought, 
to penetrate dense bodies without resistance, to be 
independent of natural light, to be absolutely invul¬ 
nerable, with all the faculties exalted and the loftiest 
aspirations gratified, with mental power to exclude 
all that is objectionable, and include what is desir¬ 
able, with the prospect of an interminable career 
of constant progress. Nothing is better. It is a 
mode of existence resembling the divine. 


10 


MYSTERIES OF NATURE 


Exclusion from the sublunary Eden was not com¬ 
pulsory. Coercion by any spiritual being is impos¬ 
sible ; but weakness, and even death, moral or 
physical, may supervene when divine support is 
discarded. Estrangement creates a gulf which 
nothing can bridge but reconciliation. 

Heaven is not an enclosure, from which its 
inhabitants cannot escape. They are free to stand 
or fall. The gates are ever open. Involuntary 
goodness is worthless here and hereafter. Hell is 
not a prison with adamantine walls. Its victims 
are limited by their condition. 

The eye is the organ of vision; but sight is a 
mental perception related to intellectual powers. If 
the natural eyes are blind, ability to see always 
remains, and can be used when there is opportunity. 
Light without the natural eye is dimly indicated in 
mind reading, and the location of objects that are 
lost. Hearing, as well as all bodily sensations and 
perceptions, are truly in the mind. After death these 
faculties are developed, unless they are stultified by 
the rejection of divine light, when a clear knowl¬ 
edge of its value has been revealed and understood. 

Such a condition involves chronic night, deplor¬ 
able weakness, and poverty of resources. The 


ii 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


smouldering embers of perverted passions and 
vitiated tastes burn with a feverish glow. The 
mind feeds on itself, and is imprisoned by its 
incapacity. It is destitution superinduced and cher¬ 
ished. The absence of spiritual life is moral death. 
The absence of light is darkness, of progress is 
decline. 

Infernal antagonism is persistent, but cannot suc¬ 
ceed. It becomes desperate; all the normal aspira¬ 
tions are reversed. The downward tendency in¬ 
creases, as a falling body, accelerated by its momen¬ 
tum, plunges into measureless depths. 

If annihilation or dissolution of any kind could 
terminate such a course, it would seem to be appro¬ 
priate. Evil suggestions from these sources could 
then be eliminated, and the death and burial of hell 
in the spiritual world thus accomplished. But the 
execution of a person because of his refusal to accept 
a gift would be unjust, providing he could be 
excluded from others in such a way that he could 
not injure them in the least, without their consent, 
and that after the fullest illumination and clearest 
knowledge of the consequences, he deliberately 
makes his final choice and holds it firmly and con¬ 
tinuously with bitter opposition to all that is better. 


12 


MYSTERIES OF NATURE 


Such a person could have no just cause for com¬ 
plaint, and any attempt to reform him by persuasion 
or force would be useless. 

The existence of malignant spiritual beings is 
evinced by the suggestions that come to the mind at 
times from external and invisible sources. If this 
is doubted, we can find them in material form in our 
prisons and dens of infamy, or walking the streets 
of our cities. 

The choice of immortal life or spiritual death 
can be made without mistake when all the condi¬ 
tions are fulfilled. 

There is no chance for suicide in the unseen hell. 
The motives for such a deed could not be worthy. 
Exit by this method, when there is no desire for 
reform, and the best gifts are despised, could not 
be justly sanctioned, even if it were possible. The 
indestructibility of matter is conceded. It may 
change form; but it cannot be obliterated. The 
enduring qualities of mind are superior. How, 
then, can undying personality pass into oblivion? 

The necessity for worlds like ours is obvious, 
when we understand that outside of these natural 
creations there is no place for the myriads of people, 
corporeal or spiritual, that throng the Universe. 


13 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The snow-line is only about three miles above the 
level of the sea in the tropics. Above this, and far 
beyond the clouds, is a region of appalling desola¬ 
tion. No sound breaks the eternal silence. The 
cold is intense. Drifting cosmic matter, meteoric 
or cometic, may appear, and beyond in obscurity 
unfathomable and undefined are the shadowy 
nebulae, chaotic and dreadful, where amid the war 
of elements the incipient systems form, and new 
worlds have a beginning. 

What we see in the heavens is interesting, as 
distance lends enchantment to the view, softened 
by the glamour of our wondrous atmosphere. But 
like the mirage of the desert, those depths of blue 
are delusive. To look for the invisible heaven in 
the sky with vague uncertainty, while the earth 
revolves and rushes forward with inconceivable 
speed, is not satisfying. If transferred at last to 
some distant star, we should still find ourselves asso¬ 
ciated with a material world. 

Heaven is not separated from us by distance. 
Millions of spiritual beings walk the earth whether 
we wake or sleep. 

Heaven in vision and in fancy should not be 
regarded as heaven in literal fact. The heavenly 


14 


MYSTERIES OF NATURE 


world consists of its people, and hell of its victims. 
Precious gems and valuable metals may illustrate 
imperishable riches. Sublime scenery, the deep 
satisfactions, and ineffable glory of the redeemed. 

New methods of acquiring knowledge and under¬ 
standing one another will supersede the rudimentary 
efforts of the past. The conventionality that 
restricts social enjoyment will be removed, and the 
greatest study of mankind will be nature, divine 
and human. The heavens and earth will be dis¬ 
solved : the elements will melt with fervent heat, 
but like the new heart they are to be regenerated 
with sacred fire. Great natural changes may occur 
in the future, as in former ages, but the demolition 
of terra-drma will not be necessary. All needful 
improvements can be made without it. 

The possibilities of the globe are beyond con¬ 
ception. Its treasures within and without are 
known in part. Its hidden riches are waiting for 
discovery. “A thing of beauty is a joy forever— 
its loveliness increases; it can never pass into 
nothingness/’ 


i5 


II 


IMMORTALITY 

The great Pyramid of Cheops was built by men 
who could not be disturbed by difficulties that have 
no parallel in history. This colossal pile covered 
thirteen acres, and was nearly five hundred feet high. 
Its chambers lined with polished stone were entered 
by intricate passages skillfully concealed, and un¬ 
known for ages. It was not only a mausoleum, but 
a treasury. The discovery of its riches was not 
made until all methods of investigation had failed. 
The secret was revealed when a stone fell from the 
roof of the passage leading to the Crypt. Nothing 
was gained by previous effort because no one knew 
where to begin. 

Immortality is revealed in mind. A divine 
thought may be the germ, or beginning of a being. 
A person was originally a thought, or conception, 
from God, which had power in itself to develop and 
organize, appropriating suitable material from its 
surroundings, thus becoming a physical, as well 
as a mental, creation. The original design was a 
complex and comprehensive thought in which all 
16 



‘It was not only a Mausoleum, but a Treasury.”— Page 














IMMORTALITY 


that constituted a human being was wrapped, as a 
seed contains all the qualities and possibilities of a 
tree, including reproduction. 

There is thought in a tree, but it is not the thought 
of the tree. It is a vital principle which was im¬ 
parted to the first tree of its kind, and has continued 
in all the successive trees that have sprung from it. 
It conforms to the original design, but is susceptible 
to improvement and great changes in varying cir¬ 
cumstances. It can adapt itself to an unfavorable 
locality. If it is growing on a hillside it bends to¬ 
ward the hill, adjusting the centre of gravity in such 
a way as to become more firmly rooted; but it knows 
no reason for this deviation, for it does not think, 
but simply conforms involuntarily to that which was 
embodied in the original suggestion, which cannot 
be disregarded when there is opportunity for its use. 

A suggestion from a divine source can be planted 
in insensate material and be effective, more effec¬ 
tive than any we can fix in mind, for it will cling 
eternally if so desired, repeating itself in all that is 
reproduced. 

Mentality in an animal may involve intelligence 
that is remarkable, but it is destitute of mind in a 
human sense. It is without the perception of dura - 

i; 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


tion. A vital idea with us, is time. How long have 
we lived and what is the outlook for the future? To 
an animal this is nothing. If it could live ten thou¬ 
sand years it would not understand it, or consider 
the possibilities and limitations of the future as we 
do. We have nothing in common with animals in 
this respect, and to entertain the idea of a spiritual 
immortality for them is absurd. They are evidently 
creatures adapted to a physical existence only, with 
no aspirations for a better life in an immortal state, 
or capacity for it. 

The idea of continued existence in another world 
is not in an animal, therefore when it dies it finds 
no environment for its mentality. Its life disap¬ 
pears like the life of a tree; it is not lost; it is 
somewhere in nature, but it is not used. It has 
served its purpose. As far as consciousness and 
capacity to act are concerned, it is extinct. 

The power of suggestion in Deity must be very 
great . 1 We possess a degree of it which can be 
cultivated with astonishing results. A person who 
has mental force, which is penetrating and tenacious, 
can plant a thought in the mind of another that 
will stay. It will take hold of his mental and physi¬ 
cal nature and work a radical change by operating 


1 Gen. i. 3. 
18 



IMMORTALITY 


upon his motives, stimulating his desires, and con¬ 
trolling his faculties. Good or evil results may 
arise from this power to impress others which some 
can exert. But a divine suggestion is far more ef¬ 
fective because it is always right, and proceeds from 
an almighty mind. 

Spiritual regeneration is effected by divine sug¬ 
gestion. It revolutionizes character, producing a 
heavenly transformation that becomes permanent. 
It involves a new creation. It is called spiritual 
life, but it is simply a thought from a divine source 
that has found a suitable environment, and has 
power to develop according to the design. It is 
certainly something vital, for it is vitality itself 
of a divine kind, and exerts a powerful influence 
as it is cherished and cultivated; but it is not endued 
with power to organize itself so as to become a 
person, for that is another kind of divine sug¬ 
gestion which involved a new creation, and meant 
the beginning of a race. 

A suggestion of this kind was given power to 
attract and appropriate substance, and thus form 
a material body while gradually developing a 
mental and spiritual personality with all its charac¬ 
teristics and possibilities. This suggestion, which 
ip 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


was at first a seed-thought, planted in suitable sub¬ 
stance, became a human being who could die and 
still live; for the original suggestion involved the 
creation of a spiritual and immortal inner being 
which would find another environment when the 
natural and temporary body disappeared, having 
power to develop a body immaterial and immortal. 

The force in this original suggestion contained 
immortal mind. It had power to create the form 
which it assumed; it was the builder of the flesh 
in which it was enshrined, and had ability to live 
without it when it had served its purpose. Im¬ 
mortality was fixed, or planted, in humanity by 
divine suggestion in the beginning. It is a part 
of our constitution. All things in nature are divine 
conceptions materialized, but persons only can live 
without natural form, because the essence of their 
existence is immortal. There is vital force in the 
life of plants and in animals some intelligence, but 
in us there is more than that. We are spiritual 
beings, and therefore we can, like Deity, live apart 
from matter, or with it, when it is expedient. 

The consciousness of being the same person is 
the most distinct conception that is known. It is 
a part of our being so essential that even in dreams 


20 


IMMORTALITY 


it is understood. Unconsciousness does not indi¬ 
cate nonentity; it is suspension of the faculties. 
Restoration may be sudden or delayed for many 
days. If death occurs unconsciousness may con¬ 
tinue for a while, or there may be an immediate 
awakening. We are so constituted that periods 
of profound repose are possible and desirable here 
and hereafter. Therefore, a person may be dead 
yet sleeping . 5 

The mind involves the entire being. Without 
it one is nothing in the world. Everything that 
constitutes personality is carried through after 
death. The body is simply refuse matter. There¬ 
fore, the characteristics of our nature will appear 
in the spiritual states; but the change in the mode 
of existence is very great. After death the desire 
for a larger sphere of activity will be stronger, 
for a new world is open, and our interest in for¬ 
mer things is not lost. There are interesting 
discoveries that will arrest our attention and oc¬ 
cupy our time, and the ease and success that ac¬ 
companies effort of the right kind will exceed 
our expectations. There are privileges in know¬ 
ing what cannot be known while in the earthly 

6 Mark v. 39, and Ch. viii., p. 138. 

21 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


form. There are powers of body and mind that 
are new, and we are not without some knowledge 
of them; but they cannot be used. There are 
heights and depths that are now entirely beyond 
our inspection, but when the spiritual eye is opened 
they can be revealed. 

The discovery of a new sphere in the starry 
heavens is hailed with delight by the astronomer. 
Its motions are studied, its distance, density, and 
possibly some of its elements, are noticed. Ref¬ 
erence is made to its size, color, and distinguishing 
peculiarities, but the limit is soon reached. After 
naming this new planet it is reckoned with others 
in our solar system, but we cannot know much 
more than this. It is clearly seen, but its mystery 
is impenetrable. There is no means of communica¬ 
tion. It is a floating island in depths of blue. Is 
it inhabited? If so, what multitudes throng its 
streets? What are its productions and its indus¬ 
tries ? What are the hopes and fears of its strange 
people? Do they notice this ball on which we are 
carried so swiftly through the realms of space? 
Who can answer these questions? 

Each planet has a history which cannot be 
opened now. It is a volume bound in shining 


22 


IMMORTALITY 


gold which may be read when we can interpret 
its contents. Now it is one of the myriads of 
celestial hieroglyphics that emblazon the sky . 6 

The power to understand is not confined to the 
intellect. The capacity to feel is the measure of 
ability, as well as to calculate and judge. The 
greatest men have the deepest sympathies and the 
strongest passions. To love intensely is divine. 
Therefore, the sensations or feelings are very im¬ 
portant, for they have to do with our happiness 
or misery in the unseen world. Every sensation 
and emotion is in the mind. The ear cannot hear. 
The membrana tympani is a little disc upon which 
sounds operate. It hears nothing. The auditory 
nerve is a slender filament by which sound is 
transmitted. It is deaf. The person only hears: 
he does not hear the sound, but the thought which 
the sound creates. The ocean roars, but the resi¬ 
dent of the beach does not know it till he thinks. 
Any sound that is not understood stimulates in¬ 
quiry. It makes us think: “What is it?” And 
if it is not noticed it is not heard. 

Conversation in the spiritual world is not de¬ 
pendent upon audible sounds. It is thought lis- 


6 See Ch. i., p. 3. 

23 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


tening to thought. The ear is not limited by the 
fleshly mechanism. In the immortal state the 
lightest whisper can be heard anywhere when the 
conditions are fulfilled. Communication is easy at 
any distance, for thought can be transferred with¬ 
out difficulty. Suggestions are easily impressed 
and fastened. The privilege of conversation with 
persons who have lived in all ages, even prehis¬ 
toric times, is for those who are able to receive it. 
Thought does not require words. The idea, even 
before it takes form, in the mind, can be grasped. 
Expression is not restricted by the inflexibility of 
material, organization, and environment. Every 
avenue of the soul is open and accessible. The 
possibilities of perception are infinite. 

Music is limited here by vocal impossibilities. 
The great composers have not found those who 
could interpret their ideas without acknowledging 
their inability to express all that should be ren¬ 
dered. The vocal organs are not strong enough 
to reach the highest notes that can be used with 
advantage; and in the descending scale the softest 
murmur that floats in the enchanted thought of 
genius cannot be expressed. There is difficulty iti 
acquiring desirable and permanent qualities be- 


24 


IMMORTALITY 


cause physical changes are constant, and failure 
is generally noticed before the prime of life. 
Power to accomplish all that is worthy of effort, 
with increasing ability and deepening interest, is 
the privilege of those who have come to immortal 
felicity. 

Taste is a mental perception. Nothing can be 
enjoyed without reflection. The best fruit is 
known by its flavor, and this is a thought arising 
from the odor and the sensation it gives. The 
sensation is also mental, for it cannot be known 
without understanding that it occurs. Taste can¬ 
not be obliterated, for it is in the mind; but it may 
be defective and useless because of its connection 
with the natural body when it is not in a normal 
condition. 

There is nothing that can interfere with the enjoy¬ 
ment of all that the senses afford in the life beyond 
the grave, unless there is corruption in the mind 
arising from the cultivation of evil tendencies and 
perverted passions . 7 

The exquisite delight and satisfaction that comes 
to our entire being when everything that is in us 

7 Immortality does not necessarily involve “eternal life” in 
a heavenly sense. See Ch. i., p. 12. 

25 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


finds its appropriate response is indescribable. The 
past cannot be forgotten, and every friendship that 
is worthy may be continued. Misunderstanding 
often mars our brightest hopes, but those who have 
felt that destiny had parted them forever may 
meet again. The union of fond hearts, in bliss¬ 
ful and uninterrupted communion, cannot be pre¬ 
vented. The smile of favor, which was changed 
into the bitter mystery of distrust, will return, 
and the sad words, “It might have been,” cannot 
throw their shadows across our pathway. 

That there is a superior and immortal Mind in 
nature is evident. This is the pledge of our im¬ 
mortality. Thoughts have a divine origin, and 
can be traced to their source. Objects in nature 
are ideas expressed, and these ideas must have 
come from an intelligent Author who cannot be 
without a purpose in the creation of rational be¬ 
ings who desire unlimited life, for we are not in¬ 
cluded with such as cannot be conscious of His 
existence, and are without knowledge of His plans, 
and cannot live when separated from matter by 
death. 

Hence the power of a thought coming from this 
Source to take material form and become a person 
26 


IMMORTALITY 


capable of fulfilling the inherent design in the con¬ 
stitution of his mind, which involved continuance 
of being in an immortal state; finding at last an 
environment wherein all his powers may be de¬ 
veloped and his career have no end. 


27 


Ill 


FIRE 

The life of the Universe is fire . 1 It is the 
most vital manifestation of force in nature, for 
without it there would be universal death. Phys¬ 
ical existence involves chemical changes that are 
igneous. Oxygen is the element in nature that 
kindles the fires of life. 

The energy of the sun is inexhaustible, because 
the elements that form its constitution are so ad¬ 
justed that production means support. A tem¬ 
porary variation in its bulk should not be regarded 
with suspicion, or made the basis of predictions 
concerning its decline . 2 The planets oscillate and 
are subject to deviations in their orbits. The 
ocean recedes from the shore and encroaches in 
another locality, but it cannot fail. 

The sun cannot give us light or heat without 


Solar energy. 


28 


See Ch. ix. 



FIRE 


our environment, for beyond this there is intense 
cold which begins on the tops of the highest moun¬ 
tains, clad in everlasting snow. He is not effec¬ 
tive unless there is opportunity for absorption and 
radiation. Therefore, the inter-planetary realms 
are cold and silent—an eternal night . 3 And yet 
the ablest mathematician cannot compute the area 
illuminated by his rays, for the atmosphere acts 
as a lens, producing optical effects that throw the 
firmament open to our view. And nothing could 
hinder us from seeing objects at much greater dis¬ 
tances if the eyes were strong enough, but the ef¬ 
fect would be dazzling and bewildering, unless 
there were physical and mental ability in propor¬ 
tion to such visual capacity. 

Light kindles a fire in the organs of vision 
which reaches the mind. The eye is composed of 
that which is easily affected by it, for vision is as¬ 
sociated with chemical changes as well as respira¬ 
tion and assimilation. Actinism in the ray finds 
the interior very susceptible; it stimulates the ret- 

3 Light is a sensation produced by the action of physical 
luminosity on the organs of vision. Without radiation and 
absorption, we could not get this sensation, nor could w* 
hear without the atmosphere which does not extend very far 
beyond the earth. 


29 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


ina, and permeates the entire organism with the 
same property that colors the flowers, and clothes 
the landscape in living green. 

Mental fire in the life is felt in the passions and 
ambitions. It is stirred with the thought of grati¬ 
fication, and burns with an exhilarating glow. 
Love is fanned by devotion and contemplation, 
and when the real merges into the ideal the future 
is bright with promise. Eternal constancy is 
pledged. It is an ecstasy—a dream of Paradise. 
But the ideal must again become the real, for life 
has its sober prose as well as its poetry and en¬ 
chantment. Yet memory holds her treasures, and, 
if enshrined in purity and noble character, like 
roses, they will bloom again in sweeter fragrance 
and undying splendor, when the future opens the 
secret of immortal felicity. 

The energy of the mind is developed by con¬ 
flagration. It is not in the anger of the desire 
that we feel the power of passion, but in its fiery 
expression. Rage reaches red heat when the plan 
for revenge is forming, but turns white before the 
fight occurs, and burns with fiercer flame until the 
fatal blow is struck and the enemy lies in the dust, 
when it subsides and the consequences are consid- 


30 


FIRE 


ered. A great fire does not cease till the last ves¬ 
tige of inflammable matter it can reach is con¬ 
sumed. 

Death cannot annihilate the tendency to oppose 
whatever is against us, or is contrary to our opin¬ 
ions. It grows stronger. All the passions are 
intensified. The capacity to enjoy is greater be¬ 
cause the physical nature is no more. Emotions 
and sensations that would burn out the strongest 
nerves and wreck the constitution of a mortal man 
can be felt, because there is provision for the de¬ 
velopment and satisfaction of all the longings that 
we notice here. The loftiest flight of poetic ex¬ 
pression has not given us an adequate conception 
of the strength and quality of passion in an ex¬ 
alted and purified human being, burning and shin¬ 
ing in the celestial state like a bright, glorious star. 

Power to overcome difficulties that would hinder 
our progress now is found in the spiritual world, 
for there are no incidental causes of failure that 
cannot be avoided. 

Property is represented by mental calculation. 
It really exists, and cannot be destroyed. The 
title is valid. The idea of possession, authorship, 
or claim by virtue of established right, is strong 


31 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


even in childhood, and increases with age. It is a 
part of the constitution of the mind, and is car¬ 
ried into the other life. Our rights cannot be 
invaded. 

Misunderstanding can be avoided because there 
is open communication, and nothing can be con¬ 
cealed that should be apparent. Witnesses can be 
had without delay, and memory be compelled to 
open her imperishable records. The facts can be 
known at a glance, for thoughts are actually per¬ 
ceptible to the spiritual observer. Matters that 
have caused years of perplexity can be speedily 
settled and thoroughly understood by all concerned. 

Property in the spiritual world is as desirable 
to them, as it is to us in this life, and the means 
of acquiring it are legitimate and must be re¬ 
spected. Of course it does not materialize, but to 
them it is real because it is so understood. It can 
be used in ways that are important to them in a 
world which is rich in its resources, and where 
values can be exchanged, and losses by casualty 
are unknown . 4 

Invention, literature, art, discovery, and ten 
thousand times ten thousand things can be traced 


4 Matt. vi. 20. 
32 



FIRE 


to their origin, and we can then see what is new 
or old. 

Fire is the element of destruction here and 
hereafter. The great libraries of antiquity have 
disappeared as it touched their precious volumes, 
burying the past in mystery and oblivion. Great 
cities have perished in a night. Nothing has been 
spared that could be consumed or wrecked in the 
awful surging billows of flame that have swept 
forest and plain in the mad search for dominion. 
But the forces of nature find nothing in mind that 
can be affected by its action unless their relation 
to it is vital; and then separation by death means 
release and continued existence in states that are 
more desirable, or worse, in every respect. 

Progress is offered, when the opportunity comes, 
and if refused or neglected retrogression is in¬ 
evitable. The possibilities are inconceivable, be¬ 
cause the time is unlimited for development, or 
decline. And yet, the sooner privilege is taken 
the greater the advantage, for there is less diffi¬ 
culty to overcome. 

Human beings are saved or destroyed by fire 
in this world and the next . 5 Nothing can save a 


6 Celestial or infernal fire. 
33 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


man who is ruined by fire but the entire renova¬ 
tion of his moral nature by forces that arrest and 
extinguish the inflammation produced by the cor¬ 
ruption of his affections. And so long as there is 
objection to this the fatal conflagration continues. 

When spiritual fire becomes corrupt it is very 
destructive. The beginning is a spark hidden in 
the centre of life. It gradually spreads through 
the entire being and bursts, at times, into a flame 
that spares nobody. It feeds on virtue and glories 
in the wreckage of character. It increases in in¬ 
tensity till the natural forces are burned out or 
destroyed by disease. 

This virulent fire, kindled by reckless tendencies 
and perverted passions, may continue in the mind 
forever. Death cannot extinguish it, but it brings 
limitation and weakness which throws its victim 
into desperate conditions, for there is nothing upon 
which it can feed even with the eyes, because of 
the moral darkness that pervades the faculties, 
superinduced and cultivated by vicious indulgences. 

Finding no response for depraved appetites in 
a state when the rottenness of life is exposed in 
its most repulsive features, there is nothing for 
such but the consumption of the immortal mind 


34 


FIRE 


by its own evil propensities, which seethe and 
writhe and struggle with effort and failure like 
the elements of a volcano that find no opportunity 
for eruption. 

Fever in the physical life may continue for a 
certain period, unless it can be broken by remedies 
that are effectual, or the patient is relieved by 
death; but when it is in the spiritual nature medi¬ 
cines cannot reach it and death never comes. 

Tendencies to evil can be checked by a careful 
consideration of the consequences when failure 
begins coupled with a desire to stop that is effec¬ 
tive; but this should be associated with an appeal 
for power directed to the Source of life, for spir¬ 
itual maladies cannot be corrected without divine 
co-operation. A falling body rapidly increases in 
velocity as it descends, and every instant becomes 
more dangerous to itself, or anything it may strike 
that can be injured; but a person falling into the 
unfathomable depths of perdition finds no obstacle 
that interferes with his desperate determination to 
know the worst. His descent is accelerated by 
the intensity of his passions, which develop with 
malignant perversity in the unearthly hell. 

The ability to acquire knowledge in the celes- 


35 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


tial state is increased by the desire to know the ex¬ 
tent of the new environment. This is stimulated 
by new methods in a life full of promise for those 
who aim at the loftiest ideals. Nothing can hin¬ 
der us, for the fruits of paradise are growing 
everywhere in this wonderful realm, where knowl¬ 
edge is the result of effort so wisely directed that 
it brings reward without delay. Years of prep¬ 
aration for the future are not necessary, for it is 
a state wherein all is open to the successful candi¬ 
date for immortal honors. 

The old and new are blended harmoniously in 
the lives of the most ancient people in heaven. 
Time cannot affect a person unfavorably who is 
renewed by changes that develop all his powers 
and open new avenues of thought when the old 
are abandoned. The old is seen in experience 
and advancement, and ability to bring the past 
from its repose and stir the future with prophetic 
revelations, while the new appears in the freshness 
and brilliancy of increasing strength and intellectual 
energy. 

The inextinguishable fire of immortal life must 
glow forever, whether it burns in the seraphic flame 
of heavenly devotion and divine rapture, or the lurid 
36 


FIRE 


embers of base desire and perverted affections. 
Like the sun it is sustained by its own energy, and 
there is nothing to break its eternal continuity, 


\ 


37 


IV 

LIGHT AND DARKNESS 

The great contrasts of this world are exceeded 
by the superior beginning which is found in the 
future life. Nothing is derived from that which 
involves the loss of opportunity, for the necessary 
evils of the corporeal condition are avoided. 

The darkness that covers half the globe, re¬ 
minding us of the necessity of sleep, subtracts years 
from the brief period of conscious existence. Rest 
is essential in the supernatural state, but there are 
no laws that require regular hours of repose. 
The celestial life is not burdened with the strain 
and tension that constantly handicaps our efforts 
here. The weight of the body is not burdensome 
to one of average proportions when in normal 
condition, but there is something that makes a 
recumbent position necessary at frequent intervals. 
The load we carry would soon overpower us if 
38 


LIGHT AND DARKNESS 


night did not find us where the pull of gravita¬ 
tion is not felt, thus relaxing the muscles, reliev¬ 
ing the brain of surplus energy, and preparing us 
for the struggle of another day. 

Rest in the spiritual state may be deferred in¬ 
definitely, for there is nothing to interfere with 
activity when it is desirable. The spiritual per¬ 
son has no weight. He can move with greater 
ease and celerity than a planet shooting through 
empty space; or, slowly and softly settle into the 
depths of the sea and explore its hidden wonders 
without difficulty or danger, for matter in any 
form cannot obstruct the passage of an immortal 
being. 

Rest, in the spiritual world, may occur when 
there is a transition to a higher sphere in which 
new privileges and honors are to be conferred. 
Seclusion and mystery heighten the effect of these 
new glories and give variety to the eternal years, 
as a night of peaceful slumber precedes the dawn¬ 
ing of a brighter day . 1 

The change from the routine of physical ex¬ 
istence is very great. The eye grows weary here. 
The city glows with brilliant illumination, turn- 


a Ch. viii. 
39 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


ing darkness into the inviting glow of scintilla¬ 
tion that glitters in ten thousand points of light. 
But when the hour for sleep has come nothing can 
prevent it; the eyelids will close and produce the 
darkness for which the eyes are longing. The eye 
is an organ depending upon conditions that cannot 
last long; it begins to wear out in the prime of 
life; but the eye of the mind can easily dispense 
with this temporary aid to vision when the facul¬ 
ties are opened in the world of spirits. 

There is no night for those who want ever¬ 
lasting day. As the globe turns over it leaves us 
on the dark side, and it is better for us now. But 
with the new powers of motion we can have in the 
life beyond, infinite day may exclude the night 
whenever we desire it. Any climate or altitude 
that suits us may be found without delay. 

At the edges of the great shadow that hangs 
over the dark side of the earth like a gigantic pall, 
morning is constantly dawning and daylight is 
fading into night. So sunrise and sunset syn¬ 
chronize forever. Somewhere it is always morn¬ 
ing; somewhere evening shadows are lengthening. 

Night does not hinder the efforts of those who 
live in the undying state, for they are not de- 


40 


LIGHT AND DARKNESS 


pendent upon the light of the sun. They find 
power to know what we cannot, because they are 
able to perceive with the inner light of which we 
now know something. 

Telepathic knowledge is beginning to be recog¬ 
nized, but it will not be of much value until cor¬ 
responding perceptions are opened, and this can¬ 
not be done till we reach the incorporeal state. 
To believe that there is a thought in the mind of 
another, without evidence in expression of any 
kind, is to see the thought intuitively. This may 
be satisfactory to one who is confident that he can 
know in this way, but he cannot satisfy others 
without better evidence, or establish the fact in 
his own mind without inquiry. He may express 
his belief and feel that he is certain, but he can¬ 
not positively know the truth till it is demonstrated 
in other ways. But no such difficulty can perplex 
the immortal man, for his ideas are associated 
with a penetrating consciousness of things un¬ 
knowable to those who are in the flesh that makes 
evidence of a natural kind useless. Nothing can 
disturb his conclusions, for he knows from actual 
observation that which we cannot perceive. 

In the life beyond there is nothing hidden by 


41 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


the obscurity that permeates our senses now un¬ 
less spiritual light is excluded. For spiritual light 
and darkness are connected with mental and moral 
conditions that are very different. 

Men of genius have risen to power by unscru¬ 
pulous methods. They could control circumstances 
and secure renown because they were not restrained 
by mental incapacity. But they could not find 
such opportunities in a state where evil designs 
interfere with effort, and bring indecision and 
weakness that become driveling imbecility . 2 There 
is nothing to prevent catastrophe of the most ap¬ 
palling nature when success depends upon in¬ 
trinsic merit; and subtlety can be instantly de¬ 
tected. 

Vices of the most detestable and dangerous kind 
are cultivated here under disguise . They fasci¬ 
nate and enthrall the senses, alluring and pollut¬ 
ing myriads in the great centres of civilization. 
The corruption arising from such sources is in¬ 
conceivable. Nothing can restrain the impulses 
that lead to ruin through reckless tendencies and 
impure passions, but a vivid conception of the facts, 
and the consequences involved. This is often post- 


2 Ch. v., p. 71. 
42 



LIGHT AND DARKNESS 


ponecl till it is too late. Moral septicemia, poison¬ 
ing the fountains of life, does its work. It may 
be concealed by the blandishments of society, which 
cover a multitude of sins and foster all kinds of 
dissipation. 

The young and unsophisticated are deceived by 
the glamour of a fair exterior. Under honeyed 
words and flattering smiles are the fangs of moral 
and physical disease, full of virus, and ready to 
pierce the innocent victim to the heart. The 
blackest crimes may be forgiven, and the evi¬ 
dences of sincerity clearly seen, under severe tests, 
showing a dominating purpose clearly understood; 
but there is reason for doubt when such evidence 
is not apparent. 

The curtain falls at death. Charity throws her 
mantle over the record, but the past is in the in¬ 
dex of the future. 

There is nothing to encourage vicious propen¬ 
sities in the other world, for evil of all kinds is 
repulsive, because there is nothing to mask its de¬ 
formity. Undisguised malignity is not attractive. 
Even here bad persons become loathsome to each 
other when they are well acquainted. They try 
to find pleasure in destroying virtue, or in the 


43 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


gratification of vicious appetites which hold them 
in iron bondage, and bring greater misery and 
degradation with every indulgence. 

The ability to ruin others which begins to fail 
here, as decay and weakness are apparent, does 
not find the opportunity on the other side that it 
had in this world. The exposure is complete. 
Every effort is baffled by the absurdity of preten¬ 
sion. Hence, temptation’s subtle power is broken, 
and exalted character is no longer tested by sus¬ 
picious persons whose motives cannot be discerned. 

When a bad man finds that he cannot escape, 
and the worst is known, he may become more des¬ 
perate and furious, like a savage beast caught" in 
a trap, which surrenders sullenly or turns upon the 
enemy, exhibiting all the ferocity of its nature. 
Such is the attitude of those whose characters are 
fixed by the firm determination that they will not 
reform. Every effort in their behalf is met with 
contempt and derision, and simply strengthens the 
position they have taken by opposition which in¬ 
tensifies their hatred of all that is heavenly. 

The love of evil for its own sake can be culti¬ 
vated and cherished until it becomes a ruling pas¬ 
sion strong even unto death, and beyond. It is 
44 


LIGHT AND DARKNESS 


illustrated by the tendency to destructiveness which 
is so familiar in the annals of crime. A man is 
jealous, or bitterly disappointed; he nurses his 
grievance and magnifies it by dwelling upon it. It 
fills him with a consuming desire for revenge. He 
resolves to have it at any cost. At length the 
climax is reached. He is not restrained by a 
thought of the consequences. Let the worst come. 
In fact, the worst he can do will, he thinks, give 
him the most satisfaction. He murders those who 
seem to be the cause of his trouble and then kills 
himself. 

It may be alleged that such a person is not re¬ 
sponsible for his deeds, being mentally unsound; 
but this is not proven in many instances. Thou¬ 
sands who have been guilty of criminal offenses, 
and endeavored to destroy themselves and failed, 
are found to be perfectly sane, and if not, they; 
were often responsible for their condition. 

Death cannot interfere with the cultivation of 
evil tendencies, unless they are caused by abnor¬ 
mal conditions, which are relieved by the change. 
Therefore, a human being in the world of spirits 
may become an abominable monstrosity, eternally 
persistent in his purpose to do something worse, 
regardless of the consequences. 

45 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The greatest wonder of the Universe is an end¬ 
less life. It is an idea that has become concrete. 
It has become a force, intelligent, unique, and in¬ 
dependent. It is full of unlimited possibilities for 
those w T hose aspirations are high. It cannot be 
duplicated, for every person is different from all 
that have lived before, or will ever live again. 
The ability to understand sublime mysteries is 
conferred. 

The golden fruits of knowledge hang in rich 
clusters on the tree of immortality, but they can¬ 
not be reached by those who are not willing to 
climb into the lofty branches and gather them. 
Thousands fail because courage and persistent ef¬ 
fort are necessary. Sentimental and weak, they 
drift onward, hoping that in some way the un¬ 
known future will bring them fortune. But eter¬ 
nal promotion cannot come to those who do not 
deserve it. Heaven is a discovery which meets 
the enraptured view of the heroic explorer. Days 
of toil and anxiety, and nights of peril, are past. 
At length the radiant morning dawns. Hope 
arches the brilliant skies with iridescent splendor. 


46 


V 

WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 

The spiritual world is not without a location, 
and there should not be difficulty in finding it, for 
there are evidences of spiritual presence that are 
not misunderstood when we are careful to know 
what they are, and whence their source. They 
may seem to be within us, and undoubtedly they 
are, for the spiritual realm is within as well as 
without, all that is visible and material. It is what 
the mind is to the body, for thought is associated 
with personality which may reach far and wide, 
affecting multitudes. 

The spiritual world is a part of the world around 
us. It is the most important part, because its num¬ 
bers are so great, including all that have lived and 
died from the most remote period to the present 
time. It is also the domain of Supreme Intelli¬ 
gence, and power, allied with the choicest spirits 
of all ages. 


47 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The invisible hell is here, but it can be excluded 
by those who live in the heavenly state; or seen in 
its worst phases when it is expedient. Differences 
of character and condition may be illustrated by 
what we see in the natural world. But the con¬ 
trasts are so great that imagination fails in the 
comparison. 

There are no valid reasons for supposing that the 
spiritual world is located in a distant part of the 
Universe. Such is its relation to this world that 
removal would not be desirable if it were possible. 
Everything around us is adjusted to our mode of 
existence. Without appropriate environment life 
would be worthless if we could live. The eye 
could find nothing in scenery if scenery were not 
made for the eye. Every faculty, all that we hear, 
feel, or know, has its counterpart in our surround¬ 
ings, which are so important that without them a 
man would be a fragment and a mystery. 

Our spiritual world is connected with our nat¬ 
ural world, because living or dead we belong to 
both. A human being originating on this planet 
must be forever identified with it. He is really a 
production of the earth, though spiritual and im¬ 
mortal. Death cannot deprive him of the charac- 
48 


WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


teristics that made him a man of our world, unless 
it should rob him of personality and identity. He 
would then be without a record or a name. 

The life beyond is not without its interests in 
the natural world which relate to the present, as 
well as the past. Therefore, the connection be¬ 
tween these worlds is very close. 

If our invisible world were located on a distant 
sphere the place would be unfavorable, for this dis¬ 
tant world, if populated, must also have a place 
for its people passing out of the natural into the 
supernatural state , 1 and being entirely foreign and 
different in their tastes and affinities, with a his¬ 
tory and kind of existence peculiar to their habitat 
—for there is diversity in the creation, and it is 
difficult for us to see how life like ours can be 
sustained on those mysterious globes—the interests 
of their spiritual world could not be identified with 
ours in a way that would make proximity desir¬ 
able. If this remote world were not inhabited it 
would not be a congenial abode, even for spiritual 
beings who are interested in life as it appears in 


1 To some the supernatural means that which is natural, 
but has not been so understood. 


49 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


corporeal humanity, and have a relation to nature 
which is important . 2 

Where, then, shall we locate our spiritual world? 
Outside of the celestial bodies is primeval space, 
dark, cold, and silent. Each planet is concerned 
with its own affairs, and has a unique environ¬ 
ment. Our spiritual world must have a founda¬ 
tion. It is found in our visible world. 

Our affairs are interesting to those on the other 
side who are in sympathy with the evolution of the 
plan of creation. We are new beings, compara¬ 
tively speaking, for we are at the beginning of an 
eternal career. They regard us with anxiety and 
hope. The chances of failure or success are in 
the balance. In this formative period, great ques¬ 
tions are to be settled. History may repeat itself, 
but it cannot be monotonous to those who love the 
records of struggling humanity. Many are enter-’ 
ing the other life from all parts of the habitable 
globe at the same time, and communication is not 
fettered by the crude facilities of the earthly state. 
Thus the two worlds are in touch, not only be¬ 
cause their interests are related, but because they 
are contiguous in territory. 


2 Ch. xi., p. 264. 
50 



WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


They have advantages which we do not possess, 
when a better condition has been deliberately 
chosen and is firmly held under circumstances that 
reveal fixed principles, that cannot be disturbed by 
thorough examination and analysis of motives. 
Nothing is gained by death when there has been 
no worthy preparation for it, and there was op¬ 
portunity for such preparation, and the necessity 
of it was clearly understood, but neglected. Death 
is the key to a world wherein spotless character 
and loyalty to divine purposes cannot be ignored 
without disastrous consequences, for in the spir¬ 
itual realm decisions are reached without unnec¬ 
essary delay, and are seen to be absolutely just, 
not only by those who are affected directly, but 
by all who may be concerned. 

The words “above” and “beneath” are often 
associated with ideas relating to the spiritual 
states. If these terms are understood in a literal 
sense they lead to conclusions that are absurd and 
contradictory. 

If we suppose that the “infernal regions” can 
be found somewhere in the bowels of the earth, 
we shall have to concede that the place is indefinite 
and no sensible person would try to find it. If, 


5i 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


however, we express belief in the existence of evil 
spirits, and their baleful influence on humanity, 
we must admit that they are above ground, for 
they are near enough to operate in and upon us. 
So, if they are beneath they are also above, and 
are not limited by locality, roaming at large any¬ 
where. There is nothing in the depths of the 
earth to attract, or hold, evil spirits. They find 
affinity in evil thoughts, and are ready to suggest 
them, when corrupt desires are cherished, whether 
their presence is noticed or not. 

Reference to the spiritual world that involves 
height or depth will not bear a literal construction. 
Condition, rank, exaltation or degradation, success 
or failure, life or death, privilege or limitation, 
happiness or misery, good and evil, and all things 
associated with character and position, should be 
understood. 

There are reasons for believing that our planet 
has a permanent place in the Universe, and as 
heaven and hell are connected with it, there 
should be no difficulty in locating these spiritual 
states. The motions of the globe are governed 
by laws that have been defined and are under¬ 
stood. These motions, and the energy in nature, 
52 


WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 

express a kind of vitality, and have a relation to 
the sun and other bodies in our solar system which 
is so important that the whole may be compared 
to an organized living thing. The productions of 
the earth, as well as its connection with the sun, 
show that it is alive. If it were taken out of our 
system it would die as quickly as a branch cut 
from a tree. It could not be grafted into another 
cluster of worlds, for it would perish intransitu. 

The Creation is the result of an effort of the 
divine being seeking a suitable environment for 
himself, and those who might be associated with 
him. Having control of forces he began to work 
upon crude material, bringing it into form and 
motion . 3 This must have occupied periods of time 
incomprehensible to us, for the foundations were 
to be permanent. After these mighty spheres had 
come to proper dimensions, and their motions had 
been adjusted to the plan for each and for the 
entire system, and it was seen that they would 
roll perpetually in their orbits without interfer¬ 
ence, they were ready for finishing and furnishing. 
Then came a glorious transformation, for light 
broke in and they were clothed with appropriate 

8 See Ch. i., p. 6; and Ch. xi., p. 271. 

S 3 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


vegetation, and inhabited by every variety of liv¬ 
ing creature suggested by divine wisdom, including 
immortal humanity. 

While the presence of Deity is unlimited, be¬ 
cause his personality pervades immensity, his home 
is in nature. It is “our Father’s house,” in which 
more desirable mansions may be found, though 
now invisible to us; yet a part of the same great 
living temple whose canopy is the blue dome above. 

The presence of living people is indicated by 
the landmarks of civilization; great cities, culti¬ 
vated fields, and the highways of commerce. If 
the business of the world should cease, or its pop¬ 
ulation disappear, evidences of neglect and decay 
would immediately follow. The progress of the 
world is maintained by constant effort and watch¬ 
ful care. So nature is sustained by an all-pervad¬ 
ing invisible Presence. It does not show neglect 
or decline. The motions of the earth are regular. 
The seasons come and go. The sun pours upon 
us inexhaustible volumes of light and heat . 4 The 
atmosphere is wholesome. Its elements do not 
lose their virtue. The laws of nature are re¬ 
spected and enforced. The soil is susceptible to 


4 See Chs. iii. and ix. 
54 



WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


attention. It responds when it is cultivated and 
nourished. The earth is full of vital forces, and 
is more productive every year. 

Should we suppose that nature had no begin¬ 
ning, then we might conclude that it needs no at¬ 
tention. But we cannot see how the plan of the 
Universe could be formed without an author, for 
there is intelligence expressed in what we see 
everywhere. If we look into the earth for signs 
of its existence from eternity, they are not ob¬ 
vious. It is plainly a formation with marks of 
early struggles and gradual development. We can 
see that it had a beginning. It must, therefore, 
have been produced by an agency independent of 
itself, having an important purpose connected with 
a great future. Certainly there is nothing to indi¬ 
cate its abandonment by the Power that created 
it. It is a valuable property, a gem among the 
stars. If its cost were estimated by the time re¬ 
quired for its development, and preparation for 
the multitudinous life that occupies sea and land, 
it must have been enormous. 

The ultimate purpose of the creation is con¬ 
summated in the spiritual world. This purpose 
included the gathering of a great and loyal mul- 
55 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


titude of worthy persons, whose interests would 
be in harmony with the divine nature, and who 
should first have opportunity to exhibit the virtues 
that must be associated with such privileges under 
circumstances that were unfavorable, thus demon¬ 
strating to themselves, and others, their ability to 
receive the best things. 

The development of sterling character involves 
the failure of many who are not disposed to ac¬ 
cept the conditions that lead to success; but with¬ 
out a standard of excellence, within the reach of 
all, and some discrimination, nothing worthy could 
be accomplished. There is, therefore, a certain 
percentage of loss, but the gain is great. 

The natural world is the source of supply for 
the spiritual, and it furnishes abundantly. About 
one-half of all that are born die in infancy, having 
no knowledge of our world that they can recall. 
Their opportunities are better than ours, for their 
perceptive faculties are not obscured by the restric¬ 
tions of the earthly life. When they are old enough 
to understand they are instructed, and their priv¬ 
ileges considered. The influences that surround 
them are heavenly, but they are perfectly free to 
form their own conclusions. All infants are saved; 

56 


WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


but it is folly to suppose that they never reach 
maturity in the other world, and have no chance 
to form character, and settle the great problems 
of that life for themselves . 5 

Candidates for eternal honors multiply as the 
world opens to the influences of civilization, and 
the long night of error and superstition disappears. 
The world of ancient times seems small when com¬ 
pared with the world of to-day. The Roman 
Empire covered the greater part of its territory. 
Much of Asia and Africa was unknown and bar¬ 
barous. Australia, the numerous islands of the 
Pacific, and the two great American continents 
were thinly inhabited by those whose knowledge 
of immortality was limited by mythical legends 
and childish fancies. Their interests could not be 
promoted by the revelation of ideas that were be¬ 
yond their reach. The sublime mysteries of the 
incorporeal states are reserved until they can be 
received by those who are prepared for them. 

There is room enough in the globe’s environ¬ 
ment for all who have entered the spiritual world, 
and all who will enter in the eternal years of the 
future, because the spiritual body is not restricted 


B Ch. xi., p. 256. 
57 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


by natural limitations. If, however, a material 
restoration of all who have died should occur, 
there would not be standing room for half the 
number on the entire surface of the earth. 

Space in the other world is as vital and impor¬ 
tant as it is here, but that world is a spiritual state, 
and there is always room enough for mind or 
spirit. It is the corporeal body that limits us, and 
makes space of a kind necessary here. We are 
surrounded by an innumerable company of spir¬ 
itual beings, good and evil; but so positive is the 
law of exclusion that they cannot manifest them¬ 
selves unless permitted. 

The thought represented by the words trans¬ 
lated “heaven” or “the heavens,” comprised so 
much, when used by inspired writers, that was 
literal as well as symbolic and mystical, that mis¬ 
understanding has crept in concerning it. The 
idea of great distance from the globe is nowhere 
indicated. The firmament with its broad expanse 
and infinite height was the best symbol of spiritual 
promotion and felicity that could be found, for it 
represented purity in its blue altitudes, and kindled 
sublime emotions and holy aspirations. 

The ascent of angels, or men, who disappeared 
58 


WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


from mortal view has led some to suppose that 
their abode is beyond the atmosphere, or possibly 
beyond the stars. But there is a record of many 
angelic manifestations in which ascent or descent 
is not mentioned. When it occurred it was sig¬ 
nificant. It had no necessary reference to locality, 
above or beneath, but to a state of exaltation, or 
limitation, and in some instances degradation and 
moral death. 

The ascension of Christ was an important act, 
because it symbolized his promotion to the highest 
position, or rank, in the kingdom of heaven. But 
the act would not have been of much consequence 
if the fact thus indicated had not been under¬ 
stood. He referred to his ascension in his first 
interview with Mary Magdalene after his death, 
intimating that she must not detain him for fur¬ 
ther conversation at that time, for his resurrection 
must be demonstrated by his appearance to other 
witnesses without delay . 6 

His ascension, or promotion, gave him unlim¬ 
ited power and great glory. This is noticed in 
the words: “He ascended on high, he led captiv¬ 
ity captive, and gave gifts unto men.” But it is 


8 John xx. 17. 
59 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


said that “He also descended into the lower parts 
of the earth.” This descent means his voluntary 
humiliation and death by which he demonstrated 
immortality . 7 

The ascent of angels indicates their high rank 
and superior privileges when compared with mor¬ 
tals. Their fall through transgression, or failure, 
does not necessarily involve their literal descent 
through space to the earth, or to some place of 
confinement within its dark interior. 

If the question is asked, “Where is the spiritual 
hell of the dead?” it is not difficult to answer. It 
is certainly “beneath” in the sense of being a 
lower, or worse condition than any that can be 
found among the living. Light is thrown upon 
this question when another is asked. “Where is 
the hell of the living?” The idea of geographical 
location or lineal distance drops out. It is in the 
worst* (lowest) people zvherever they are found. 
It is not limited to London, or Paris. Undoubt¬ 
edly it can be found, in these cities as well as in 
New York, or in any rural district, remote wilder¬ 
ness, island of the sea, or vessel floating on its 
surface. It is where dark deeds are premeditated 


7 Eph. iv. 8-10. 
60 




WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


and performed, where human beings are sinking 
into moral mud, corruption, degradation, weakness, 
and oblivion. 

In the Revelation of St. John there are descrip¬ 
tions of visions, so vivid and realistic, that they 
have been understood by many to be correct de¬ 
scriptions of what has occurred, or will occur in 
the spiritual world; and some have gone so far as 
to seek a location for the “bottomless pit,” and 
the “lake of fire,” and not finding any that was 
satisfactory have indulged in some speculation, and 
finally concluded that they “must be somewhere 
in the Universe.” Sincere in their efforts, and 
anxious to find the exact truth, they have tried to 
make the Bible a text-book, studying its pictures 
of events in heaven and hell, as they would ob¬ 
jects of nature, and attempting to prove that their 
conceptions were right by introducing parallel pas¬ 
sages which they thought were appropriate. 

A vision, divinely given, is not so important as 
the significant truth which it reveals. It is pic¬ 
torial language which we are to translate carefully, 
without regarding the scenery and acting, as some¬ 
thing permanent which we may again notice after 
death. When Peter “fell into a trance, and saw 
61 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


heaven opened, and a certain vessel descending 
unto him, as it had been a great sheet knit at the 
four corners and let down to the earth, wherein 
were all manner of four-footed beasts of the 
earth, and wild beasts, and creeping things, and 
fowls of the air. And there came a voice to him: 
‘Rise, Peter; kill and eat/ and the vessel was re¬ 
ceived up again into heaven .” 8 He concerned him¬ 
self at once about the meaning of the vision, which 
came to him after some study and reflection. He 
did not imagine that the great vessel which he 
saw let down from heaven and taken up again 
was one of the things that might be found in 
heaven. He studied what he saw and heard, giv¬ 
ing special attention to those things that were 
deeply impressed upon his mind by emphasis, or 
repetition. 

When John saw, in vision, “the holy city, new 
Jerusalem, coming down from God, out of heaven,” 
he made a careful record of what he saw and 
heard. But it is not necessary for us to suppose 
that this was a real city or an exact representation 
of one that will be seen in heaven . 9 This is what 
some have understood, and mathematical calcula- 


Acts x. 


9 Rev. xxi. 



WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


tions have been made to ascertain its capacity. An 
ingenious writer says: “/\nd he measured the city 
with a reed, twelve thousand furlongs. The length, 
height, and breadth of it are equal.” “Twelve 
thousand furlongs, 7,920,000 feet, which, being 
cubed, is 948,988,000,000,000,000,000,000 cubic 
feet, the half of which we will reserve for the 
throne of God and the court of heaven, half of the 
balance for the streets, and the remainder divided 
by 4.96, the cubical feet in the rooms 19 feet 
square and 16 feet high, will be 5,743,759,000,000 
rooms. We will now suppose that the world 
always did and always will contain 900,000,000 
inhabitants, and a generation will last 33^2 years 
(2,700,000 every century), and that the world 
stands 100,000 years—27,000,000,000,000 persons. 
Then suppose there were 11,230 such worlds equal 
to this number of inhabitants and duration for 
years, then there w r ould be a room 16 feet long 
and 17 feet wide and 15 feet high for each per¬ 
son, and, yet, there would be room!” 

The vision of the city is easily interpreted. It 
represents the redeemed and purified church in the 
spiritual heaven. Its members are very intelligent 
and rich in their privileges. Precious gems and 
63 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


clear light indicate this. Safety and freedom are 
indicated by the walls and their open gates. The 
foundations and the buildings are of very precious 
stones and gold, which is transparent, thus repre¬ 
senting character of the highest and purest type. 
“Measuring” is considering or contemplating, dwell¬ 
ing upon the felicity and glory of the heavenly 
and immortal life. 

Crude and materialistic views of the spiritual 
world have been fostered by poets and hymnolo- 
gists who have presented scenery, symbolism, and 
descriptive imagery in attractive forms which have 
been adapted to music, still more interesting, and 
sung by millions whose interest in the truth was 
superficial, and who have been actually demoral¬ 
ized by dwelling upon the pictures in the hymn or 
song, and the interesting music; because the in¬ 
trinsic ideas that should take hold of the mind 
and change character seemed unreal or unintelli¬ 
gible to them. Such productions may be popular 
for a while, but in time they become nauseating 
to thoughtful people, and reaction follows. Suc¬ 
cessful is the hymnologist who combines what is 
agreeable with underlying sentiments that rivet the 
attention and exert a powerful transforming in- 
64 


WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


Alienee upon the life, for the truth is seen and 
felt. 

Ideas concerning the hell of the spiritual world 
that were presented to large and intelligent au¬ 
diences with startling effect, and made a pro¬ 
found impression fifty years ago, are now omitted 
in many prominent and influential churches, be¬ 
cause they would not be received. And there is 
objection, among the most sincere and intelligent 
people, that is quite general, to descriptive dis¬ 
courses on this subject in which illustrations from 
the Bible are used. Not because the truth is ob¬ 
jectionable, but because there is something in these 
representations, as they are generally understood, 
that is perplexing and unreasonable, and seem¬ 
ingly unjust. 

To those who believe that wilful mistakes, cul¬ 
tivated and perpetuated, have the worst conse¬ 
quences here and hereafter, the prospect of a living 
death as the result of such error does not seem 
improbable, for they see human wrecks walking 
the streets of our cities whose condition answers 
this description. There is, therefore, nothing too 
strong in the representation of such a calamity 
if it is true, for such wrecks, and worse ones, are 
65 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


in the spiritual world. The figures and emblems 
used should be the most terrible and revolting that 
can be imagined. But there is difficulty in present¬ 
ing these things, because they seem incredible to us, 
for they are not demonstrated by natural observation 
and experience. And we have come to a period 
in history when we look for evidence of this kind, 
and when it is wanting we hesitate and wonder. 

A careful investigation of this subject will show 
that we are dealing with oriental symbolism, par¬ 
able, and metaphor, easily understood when it 
was written, but difficult for us now, because we 
are so different in our modes of expression and 
interpretation. Therefore, ministers who are ac¬ 
customed to scientific research and metaphysical 
inquiry, in an age when new light is breaking in 
on all sides, are more cautious and less confident 
in their utterances concerning hell; and this fact 
is perceived by their congregations, and there is 
mystery, silence and doubt. 

There is a great reaction. The literalism and 
crudeness of the past will not be tolerated, and 
many are waiting for clearer light before making 
positive assertions. 

Bible revision has been helpful to multitudes. 

66 


WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


Creeds are being overhauled, and the antiquated 
rubbish of the centuries swept away. The time for 
a new and better understanding of the other world 
has come, and those who are anxious for the 
truth can find it. 

Hell has become a by-word and a myth to many. 
Others think that the idea involves something 
strong or powerful, and when they wish to be 
emphatic and forcible they introduce the word 
“hell,” supposing that it helps them to impress, or 
alarm, an opponent. But it has very little weight 
when used for this purpose among thoughtful per¬ 
sons, for they know that the word is a synonym 
for zveakness. 

When a man is angry he may express himself 
in what he calls “strong language.” He looks 
fierce and throws off rapidly some phrases in 
which the words “God” and “hell” are conspic¬ 
uous. When analyzed his words usually have no 
meaning, unless they express a prayer. He thinks 
he has been “swearing,” and yet his language, or 
the ideas it represents, cannot properly be defined 
as such. Undoubtedly he has been wicked in his 
view of himself, or profane, if he meant to be. 
But when he reflects on his “strong language” he 
67 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 

finds that he has been as weak and silly as a vul¬ 
gar little boy, who does not know the meaning of 
words and repeats empty phrases. And, yet, a 
distinguished senator, or noted physician, whose 
opinions are worth something in the medical world, 
or a “noble lord,” may seek “relief” under pres¬ 
sure in the use of such language which he thinks 
is remarkably “strong.” 

The spiritual hell of the next world is clearly 
defined in the Scriptures—it is called the “second 
death.” Former translations in which hades, or 
the state of the dead, including good and bad, or 
the grave, were rendered “hell” have been cor¬ 
rected in revised editions, and there is very little 
misunderstanding concerning words and terms that 
refer to perdition in the other life. 

The bottomless pit, or the abyss, with which 
darkness and chains are associated, is the symbol 
of obscurity and misery. It has no location, for 
it is not a place. It represents ignominious defeat 
and limitation, or a source of evil from which 
calamity proceeds. 11 


11 Rev. ix. i. 



WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


The “second death” is symbolized by a lake of 
fire, from which deadly gas emanates. Of course 
no such lake can be found in the spiritual state, 
for it is a world of spiritual beings. Animals and 
things do not belong to it, for they do not, and 
cannot pass into the immortal state, although na¬ 
ture is open to people in the spiritual world who 
are capable of enjoying it. 

There is nothing more dreadful than the crater 
of a large active volcano, when its depths are seen 
in the night. Not far from the Isle of Patmos, 
where John wrote the Apocalypse, was Stromboli, 
“flaring as the great light-house of nature in the 
Mediterranean.” Mauna Loa, in Hawaii, is about 
13,000 feet above the level of the sea. Its crater, 
Kilauea, is remarkable. It is three and a half 
miles broad and one thousand feet deep, and con¬ 
tains a sea of fire always surging and roaring, and 
sometimes swelling and overflowing, sending forth 
great streams of burning lava. With such a pic¬ 
ture in his thought, John defined the second death, 
because he could find nothing that would express 
his conception of it more vividly, or produce a 
stronger impression upon the people of his times 
to whom the Revelation was sent, for many of 
69 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


them had witnessed such phenomena. But they 
did not understand that such a lake of fire was in 
the other world, and would eventually become a 
receptacle for the Devil and his angels, together 
with vast numbers of incorrigible human beings 
who had lived and died. They looked through the 
illustration, and grasped the fact it represented, 
and studied it, looking for all the divine light they 
could get, and found that deliberate and inten¬ 
tional moral failure here is more disastrous here¬ 
after than any calamity known on earth, for it 
culminated in the complete wreckage and prostra¬ 
tion of a person without ending his existence. 

No one in the spiritual world, after death, can 
be (literally) cast, or thrown, into a pit and 
chained or confined in a fiery lake. Devils or 
demons have never been expelled or cast out of 
people by divine coercion, nor angels driven out 
of heaven. 12 Evil spirits are active, exerting a bad 
influence and doing mischief as long as they can. 
The law of limitation is in themselves. Although 
they are represented in vision, and prophetic 
imagery as dethroned, or cast down, or out, or 
confined to what seems like a locality. Their 

12 See Ch. i., p. n; and Ch. x., p. 224. 

7 o 



WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


fall, and obscurity, and misery is the result of 
incapacity . 1S 

The same consequences follow in this life when 
men live long enough, and in many instances they 
do. Having an increasing desire to do worse 
regardless of the results that are sure to follow 
and bring a curse upon themselves and their vic¬ 
tims. Mental and physical decline at length suc¬ 
ceeds, and they are out of the way so far as their 
influence upon others is concerned. And still they 
live, and are worse than dead, for they have lost 
the ability to enjoy life, and are full of corruption. 
They may seek death, and find it in suicide, and 
awake in the other world to find themselves in a 
condition much worse, but with a strong determi¬ 
nation to be as bad as possible, no matter what it 
costs. They find limitation, weakness and misery. 

Decline is not always gradual. A man may be 
suddenly and permanently prostrated by excess 
and passion, and become a mental and physical 
wreck, chained hand and foot, by vice and folly— 


18 When divine support is finally and unequivocally re¬ 
jected, it is entirely withdrawn. The consequences that fol¬ 
low inevitably are more appalling and disastrous than any we 
can observe in this life. Rev. xxii. II. 


71 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


a sudden failure, a complete collapse. So spir¬ 
itual devils resisted Christ, and failed, and were 
cast out, or went down finding themselves incapa¬ 
ble of further effort—they dropped into shame 
and contempt, accepting voluntarily a living death. 14 

There has been much erroneous teaching con¬ 
cerning the nature and ability of evil spiritual 
beings. It has been supposed that they retained 
their strength and intelligence perpetually , or could 
not be restrained until they were confined in some 
obscure locality, or banished from our planet. 
The fact that failure of every kind, and final col¬ 
lapse is the natural and inevitable consequence of 
a very bad life, has been overlooked. This law 
of limitation is effective in the spiritual world. 

Some have thought that the Devil of Bible his¬ 
tory 15 was omnipresent, and almost omniscient. 
They have clothed him with many attributes that 
properly belong to Deity. They have stolen the 
livery of heaven and arrayed him in it. They have 
given him God-like faculties and infallible resources. 
They believe that he is as progressive and aggres- 


14 It may begin in the natural world. Gen. ii. 17. 

15 As it is generally understood. 


72 



WHERE IS THE SPIRITUAL WORLD? 


sive as he has ever been, and will continue as such 
for an indefinite period. 

The activity of the tempting devils or demons 10 
of former times, is not necessarily a guarantee of 
their effectiveness to-day. Undoubtedly we have 
spiritual enemies as subtle, malignant and damna¬ 
ble, as any that were known thousands of years 
ago; but it cannot be proven that they are the 
same persons. 

18 Synonymous. 


73 



VI 

ANGELS 

The mystery of angelic existence can be more 
easily understood when it is compared with inex¬ 
plicable natural phenomena. 

The growth of a plant is noticed in the expand¬ 
ing leaf, but the subtle energy that lifts it out of 
the earth, and builds its branches, erecting a stately 
tree, cannot be observed. There is a plan, but the 
problem of its execution—the secret of its con¬ 
structive force, defies analysis. It is easy to ac¬ 
count for the substance in it, when it dies. It 
decays, passing into the air, and mingling with the 
earth. Not an atom is lost; but what becomes of 
the imponderable and immaterial vitality? Cer¬ 
tainly it is something very real. It was the most 
important part of the tree. It was in the seed—an 
invisible embryo, having mighty power, for it de¬ 
veloped itself, and, gathering material from many 


74 


ANGELS 


sources, produced a giant of the forest, able to 
endure the storms of a century. It filled every 
part of the tree, from the deepest roots in the 
darkness to the topmost branch, a hundred feet 
above, waving in the sunlight. It was, therefore, 
an invisible tree, manifesting its presence by the 
visible, and material form it had created; and the 
evidences of life that it exhibited. When the body 
in which this hidden, but forceful agency, had re¬ 
mained so long, was parted from its secret builder 
and nourisher, it fell in ruins never to rise again. 

This vital energy, fully developed and mature 
was not lost. Being something it could not be¬ 
come nothing. Nor could it be blended with the 
surrounding elements in such a way as to make 
identification impossible to one capable of such dis¬ 
crimination. This would be easy for the Author 
of life, because every variety of existence has been 
generated by him, and he knows what becomes of 
it after it has passed out of the visible form. 

It is evident that we cannot locate, or identify 
such a thing, and to us it must remain a profound 
mystery. Nevertheless, its existence cannot be 
successfully denied. It is still a part of nature. 
If it finds no environment, and, therefore, is not 


75 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


used again, it has served its purpose, and, like 
everything else that has lived in the visible world 
and disappeared, it has no apparent utility or 
capacity for a normal existence. To us, it is of no 
consequence. It is like a thing that is lost, and, 
so far as we are concerned, is nothing, unless it 
can be found. It occupies no more space than an 
obsolete idea, and, therefore, it is not in the way. 
It is somewhere in the laboratory of nature, and 
could be discovered and identified if one could be 
found with ability for such difficult work. There¬ 
fore, a tree has a kind of soul—an invisible force 
within, full of promise and potency. 

The growth and development of a human being 
is similar. He leaves the material body. But he 
is very different from a tree or an animal, for he 
is able to understand that he has been transferred 
to another state, and can exist without the body 
in which he formerly lived. He finds that he has 
the capacity for a new mode of existence, and if 
his tendencies are right he rejoices in the fact, for 
he sees that he can do better. He finds that ample 
provision has been made for super-mundane life, 
and that it is adapted to his tastes and ambitions; 
for he is a rational and moral being, having some 
76 


ANGELS 


characteristics and proclivities that are like those 
of the divine Creator who lives without natural 
form, and prefers the spiritual state because of its 
great advantages. 

Angels, good and bad, are human, and were 
earthly in their origin . 1 They lived and died and 
constitute the inhabitants of the spiritual world. 
They are not a different order of beings, but are 
simply men and women of the immortal states. 
There is no authentic record of the creation of angels, 
which show's that they were incorporeal in the begin¬ 
ning. It cannot be shown that they have never lived 
in the flesh as do. When inquiry w r as made con¬ 
cerning our nature in the other -world, the Saviour 
plainly stated that those who were worthy of a 
heavenly resurrection would be angels, for he said 
they are, in that superior life, “ ‘equal unto/ or 
‘as/ the angels.” 2 Not only in respect to immor¬ 
tality did he understand them to be the same , but 
in respect to the marriage relation, and in all other 
respects . 3 He refers to Moses, and Abraham, and 

1 Ch. ix., p. 180. 

2 Matt. xxii. 30. Luke xx. 36-38. 

3 The scope is not limited. We should not infer from 
Christ’s words in this passage that we shall lose the charac¬ 
teristics of manhood or womanhood when we enter the other 

77 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


others, as examples of men who had become angels. 
And it cannot be shown that a bad man is not 
“equal unto,” or “as,” a spiritual devil on the 
other side. 

Angels appear in human form and in spiritual 
bodies. In vision, or in symbol, they may have 
wings, or assume various shapes, illustrating char¬ 
acter, or powers, but in fact they are spiritual men 
and women. As messengers they appeared, and 
were known, as men of a heavenly kind, represent¬ 
ing the celestial state, in their apparel, as well as 
their expressive faces. 

The first chapter of Genesis gives an account of 
the Creation in general, including mankind. The 
second chapter is specific. We come to the pro¬ 
duction of a certain man whose locality is men¬ 
tioned. He has special privileges, and is honored 
as the progenitor of a new race with a great future, 
through which a divine revelation is to be given 


world. Sexuality is in the mind. Man is, and must be, eter¬ 
nally different from woman. The marriage relation, as we 
have it in this life, involving legal restrictions, births and 
deaths, will be a thing of the past. But connubial love, ex¬ 
alted, pure, celestial and rapturous, will find expression and 
response. This implies unions far more desirable than any 
known to us, making heaven the ideal life. 

78 



ANGELS 


to the world. He is tested by his openness to the 
spiritual states, and fails when an invisible enemy 
called “the serpent'’ enters into his thoughts. Who 
was this spiritual tempter in the primeval paradise ? 
No account of his origin is given, but it is implied . 4 

There are reasons for believing that Adam and 
Eve were not the only people on the globe at that 
time, and that many generations had lived and 
died. Adam was a new creation, and the only 
man in that country. He was isolated and pro¬ 
tected, with a great purpose in view. 

That “the serpent” or devil was a man in the 
spiritual world is seen by the reference to his 
descendants or “seed,” and their future conflict 
with the descendants of Adam . 5 “Seed” here 
means natural progeny . 6 The “serpent ” 7 entered 

6 Ch. x., p. 211. 

7 The origin of the satan of Eden has been a dark mystery 
for many centuries. If we regard him as a spiritual man 
who had access to Eve’s mind because of her susceptibility 
to impressions from the other world, we have clearer light on 
angelology. The reference to his “seed,” which means chil¬ 
dren or descendants in a literal sense, if it means anything, 
together with what is generally conceded by eminent scholars, 
and confirmed archaeological researches, viz., That nations 
lived on this earth more than 6000 years ago, furnishes us 
with a clue to this secret of the ages. 

79 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


into the mind of Eve. She was corrupted, and 
the pair demoralized, thus losing the Eden of divine 
union, and with it many privileges which they 
could not enjoy without it. 

Cain, the eldest and only surviving son of Adam, 
fleeing as a refugee to a distant country, after the 
murder of Abel, found inhabitants. He married, 
and became prosperous, building a city. Whence 
these inhabitants? Seth was the third son of 
Adam, born after the banishment of Cain. There 
is no record of daughters born to Adam before 
the birth of Seth. If we suppose that daughters 
were born before the time of Seth, and some of 
them wandered into that far off land of exile, 
and formed a small female community, and that 
Cam induced one of them to become his wife, 
we shall find that such a theory is unnecessary, 
for there is nothing in the sacred records to show 
that pre-adamic and co-adamic men have not 
lived. 

Adam was the first man of a new race, and as 
such his genealogy was very carefully preserved. 
There is no reason for suspecting the accuracy of 
the records as they stand, or bridging an imaginary 
chasm by the introduction of persons in the line 
80 


ANGELS 

of descent, who are not noticed in the history of 
the Hebrew nation. 

The origin of the different races of men has 
been a matter of conjecture among intelligent 
ethnologists for many years . 8 Those who have 
gone so far as to make Adam the father of all 
mankind have been confronted with problems that 
they could not solve. They have tried to make 
their theories reasonable by indulging in speculative 
views that are not sustained by authentic history, 
and a careful study of the facts. 

Adam’s line to Noah is the record of a distinct 
race which had multiplied rapidly, and had become 
very corrupt. A flood was predicted which was 
understood by those who heard the warning to be 
a judgment and a calamity which could be avoided. 
It occurred, and the same race began again in Noah 
and his family. It is preposterous for us to sup¬ 
pose that this deluge covered the entire globe. 
It destroyed the world as it was known to 
Noah at that time, and the people to whom he 
preached. 


8 As angels once belonged to the natural world, angelology 
is here associated with ethnology. Hence these thoughts on 
the origin of races. 


81 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


Only about three centuries later, according to 
undisputed chronology, we come to the history of 
Abraham, and his journey into Egypt, because of 
a famine. Here he found a dark race, and a very 
ancient kingdom . 9 His wife attracted attention and 
curiosity because she was a “fair” woman. Abra¬ 
ham and his wife were direct descendants of Noah, 
and were good examples of the Adamic type, which 
was white, and noble in physique, having interest¬ 
ing and intelligent faces. 

They kept themselves apart from other races 
with scrupulous care, believing that they were a 
chosen people with a great destiny. Intermarriage 
with other races was forbidden by law. A devia¬ 
tion from this rule was uncommon. It meant 
ostracism and the forfeiture of national privileges. 
Sometimes a compromise was made to conciliate 
a powerful foreign nation, as in the case of Solomon 
and an Egyptian princess; but it was regarded as a 
necessary evil. 

Thus they continued to be a separate people even 
when in captivity, and were often desired in royal 
palaces because of their distinguished appearance 
and remarkable intelligence. Jesus Christ was an 


9 Gen. xii. 10-20. 
82 



ANGELS 


example of this superior race in every respect. Not 
until after the final destruction of Jerusalem—the 
National Capital—did great changes come, and the 
glory of these Adamic men depart. 

In spite of these facts, and the existence of 
colored races noticed in early Bible times, and in 
secular history, relating to remote periods, there 
are those who would make Noah the father of an 
African negro of the most pronounced type. They 
would go farther and find in him the progenitor 
of the Papuans, and the Maoris, and the Aborig¬ 
ines of America, including distant Patagonia. 
They would make all men true sons of Adam, 
even the little black dwarfs recently discovered in 
the dense forests of equatorial Africa. 

There is a curious theory concerning Ham, a 
son of Noah. It is supposed that he was a freak 
of nature, and was born black, because his name 
signifies “swarthy” or “sun-burnt.” Hence we have 
the Egyptian and all the other dark races of every 
shade and variation. Nothing, however, is said 
about the color of Ham’s wife. Nor can it be 
shown that Ham was black because of his name; 
for many a black man’s name is White, and many 
a white man’s name is Black or Brown. There is 
83 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


nothing to show that in Ham a colored race 
originated. 

Changes of climate and conditions affect racial 
characteristics to a certain extent; but there are 
parts of the world where the original inhabitants 
were found, if history and observation are of any 
value to us. They lived in these regions because 
of their adaptation to them in the beginning. If 
men of a different kind were compelled to live there 
they would, in a few years, become extinct. 

Some races have been cut off by great natural 
barriers, from other parts of the world, and very 
little has been known about them. 

It is reasonable to think that men are indigenous 
to the regions where they were found in the be¬ 
ginning . 10 We have tropical men as well as plants 
and animals. And while men can adapt them¬ 
selves to some countries that are not congenial, 
because of their intelligence and vitality, there is 
a terrible strain upon the constitution if they re¬ 
main there long, showing that it is not their 
habitat. 

The characteristics of a race are not only in the 
color, form, and features, but in the blood and 


10 See Ch. i., p. 8. 
$4 



ANGELS 


mind, and cannot be wholly eliminated by a change 
of climate and locality, although they may be 
greatly modified by the union with other races. 
This modification can generally be detected through 
knowledge of their history and close observation, 
for “blood will tell.” The distinguishing marks 
of a race are firmly fixed . 11 

The evolution of a human being, from the nat¬ 
ural to the spiritual realm, is in harmony with laws 
from which there is no deviation, unless a miracle 
occurs, and then the final transition must come 
within a limited time, for the established order is, 
first, “that which is natural; and afterward, that 
which is spiritual .” 12 

The consciousness of the change, and the ad¬ 
vantages or disadvantages, it brings, is something 
peculiar to mankind. We, alone, among the mul¬ 
titudinous creations around us, are able to under¬ 
stand that, life here, and hereafter, is what we 
make it. And when the earthly mode of existence 
is ended the realization of this fact is still apparent. 

A return to the natural state is impossible, if a 


“Acts xvii. 26. One in nature or kind, i.e., human, not 
in blood or race. See R. V. 

“Cor. xv. 45. 


85 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


second physical birth is implied, for we begin with 
the mental, as well as the physical, embryo, simul¬ 
taneously. A person who imagines that he may 
have lived in another age, and is now living again 
in this age in another natural body, is deluded. 
He could not get rid of his former history and 
experience, and would soon find that he was in a 
body that did not belong to him, if such a union 
were possible. And, yet, thousands cherished this 
idea in ancient times, and some entertain it now. 

There is opportunity for a spiritual devil to enter 
into the mind of a person in this life and exert a 
strong influence, controlling and deluding him, if 
he does not object. Demoniacal possession can be 
cultivated and developed. It was eagerly sought 
by many in ancient and pagan times, who aban¬ 
doned themselves to it, knowing the facts. In¬ 
stances of this kind can be found in heathen coun¬ 
tries to-day. Such persons are very susceptible to 
influences from the other world, and when they 
find that there is a better way, may dismiss the 
foul inspirer, and accept divine guidance. Cases 
of this kind are rare among enlightened people. 

Many, prompted by curiosity and a strong desire 
to know something about the spiritual world, are 
86 


ANGELS 


willing to entertain “spirits ” 13 who seem to be 
harmless, and somewhat heavenly in their efforts, 
and would like to get acquainted and become con¬ 
fidential. There are sincere people who are willing 
to go “under control,” or listen to those who are 
“under control,” or think they are. Wonders of 
this kind are bewildering, and may be dangerous 
to some people. Some think that these things fur¬ 
nish evidences of the existence of the other mys¬ 
terious but invisible world around us . 14 

It is certain that we can find different degrees 
of divine inspiration, and the influence of celestial 
angels. Our susceptibility to the other world is 
wonderful. The mind is like a balance delicately 
poised, that can weigh the thousandth part of a 
grain, even the lightest breath producing a per¬ 
ceptible change. 

The cultivation and stimulation of these facul¬ 
ties which may enable us to look into the other 
life and know something about it, that can be 
demonstrated in a way that is helpful to us, is im¬ 
portant, for it is to be our permanent environment. 
Here we make a brief beginning. As a plant, strug¬ 
gling in the dark earth, breaks through to find itself 
“So-called. “See Ch. xii. 

87 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


unrestricted in its normal sphere in the bright sun¬ 
light, with the boundless heavens above it. 

It is surprising that there is in this age so little 
interest manifested in heavenly angels on the part 
of those who are anxious to find all that God has 
to offer those who are loyal to Him. 

In Bible times communications from angels were 
very desirable. Good men listened, and looked, 
for such manifestations, and were not disappointed. 
The injunction: “Be not forgetful to entertain 
strangers; for thereby, some have entertained angels 
unawares ,” 15 is not heeded, or is misunderstood. 
While this passage is thought to be important, and 
should stimulate us in the careful consideration of 
such guests, as are worthy of our hospitality and 
attention, the idea of entertaining a spiritual mes¬ 
senger from heaven is entirely ignored, or regarded 
as simply an illustration of something that hap¬ 
pened in former times. Whereas the possibility of 
interviews with angels is the vital truth which the 
inspired writer would impress, and the probability 
of missing such golden opportunities, unless great 
care and discrimination are used, is noticed. 

The appearance of angels in those days was 

15 Hcb. xiii. 2. 

See reference to illustration: “Henry Ward Beecher,” p. 98. 

88 



ANGELS 


sometimes natural. They looked like mortals; but 
they proved to be different as they were spiritually 
discerned. 

Such was the case when Paul saw a man of 
Macedonia, one night when he was in Troas, who 
said: “Come over into Macedonia and help us ” 16 
Paul was not startled or alarmed by this vision, 
•for he was prepared to see any person from the 
spiritual world, whose credentials could be tested 
by divine approval. This interview, and communi¬ 
cation, was very important, for it led to the intro¬ 
duction of Christianity into Europe. The appear¬ 
ance of persons in full form, who were able to show, 
without doubt, that they were from heaven, was 
not very uncommon in those times. 

Angelic manifestations are perfectly legitimate 
in these times. They may be as appropriate now 
as ever. There is no reason why this century 
should not be a golden age, for the world is pro¬ 
gressive. 

The danger arising from delusion, ignorance, 
and superstition, was as great in the first century 
as it is to-day. Paul found rank evils of this kind 

“Acts xvi. 9. This vision included the presence of a 
spiritual man of Macedonia who came as messenger or angel. 

89 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


in Macedonia, as well as Ephesus, and Cyprus, and 
indeed, everywhere, which he sternly rebuked, and 
was able to conquer. But he still clung to his 
visions, and revelations, and gloried in them, for 
they were a secret of power, giving him remark¬ 
able spiritual discernment and ability, as the revealer 
of the wonders of the heavenly world. 

Heaven and hell were open to St. John. His 
mind was flooded with views in which angels ap¬ 
peared, and conversed with him. He did not 
become erratic. His faculties were well preserved 
to old age. He was calm, firm, systematic, and 
accurate, sound in judgment, mighty and practical 
in his work. 

The delusions of our times will not be banished 
until learned men, who rank high in the churches, 
are willing to know more about the other world. 
Erroneous ideas are gaining ground rapidly, and 
are very plausible and interesting because they are 
mixed with some truth. To simply ignore, or 
condemn, these things will not do, because there 
is a hunger in humanity for the mysterious and 
supernatural, and people will explore and investi¬ 
gate, and fall into perplexity, or possibly fanaticism, 
and fatal mistakes. 


90 


ANGELS 


Let magicians, wonder-workers, “divine” healers, 
“mediums,” mental and physical specialists, pro¬ 
ceed. When they have done what they can, and 
have succeeded in helping people, let the facts 
speak for themselves. But when there is a desire 
for clearer light and greater power—and there are 
those who are looking for it in the God of the 
Bible—let a man like Moses step forward. A man 
of profound learning and great natural ability, 
having a national reputation, who has been thor¬ 
oughly tested by the severest trials in which the pure 
gold of character has been developed; and who has 
knowledge of the spiritual world that is remark¬ 
able, and can demonstrate the fact by signs and 
wonders, so far superior to all they have known 
who do not possess his authority and credentials, 
that they will concede his supremacy, because he 
can abundantly satisfy them in matters that per¬ 
tain to the supernatural realm, point out their 
errors, and furnish them with the truth. 

Such men are demanded by the times, and they 
can be found when they are willing to accept the 
tests, and look for power from the right Source. 
Years of preparation and discipline may be required, 
but when they are ready and begin to work, we may 
91 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


expect that the Red Sea will open; the water of life 
gush forth in the desert; manna fall in the wilder¬ 
ness, and a millennium appear. 

Fallen angels have been objects of interest be¬ 
cause of the mystery supposed to be associated 
with their descent from lofty regions above the 
clouds, where they once enjoyed, it is thought, a 
heaven of purity and felicity. Misunderstanding 
will disappear after there has been a careful exami¬ 
nation of passages in the prophetic style, that refer 
to the descent of evil angels, or men. The King 
of Babylon is noticed by Isaiah. He is called 
Lucifer, son of the morning . 17 He is represented 
as “fallen from heaven.” Christ saw, with pro¬ 
phetic view, “Satan, as lightning, falling from 
heaven.” 17 

Probably there never was a time in the history 
of the world when the influence of evil spirits was 
so conspicuous, in “high places,” as in the first 
century. Rome dominated the civilized world, and 
her rulers were, at times, satanic in character and 
administration. Such were Tiberius, Caligula, and 
Nero. The empire was rotten at the centre. 
Abominable crimes and excesses made the palace of 


17 Is. xiv. 4-12. Luke x. 18. 
• 92 



ANGELS 


the Caesars an inferno. The world suffered and 
struggled under the despotism of hell. Paganism 
began to lose its power over the masses. The 
gods were more disreputable than men, and human 
beasts that sat on thrones were deified. Paganism 
was the vile nest on which devilism sat hatching 
the crimes and miseries of the age. Communica¬ 
tions from the spiritual world were eagerly sought 
by distinguished persons. The gods could be easily 
simulated. The ancient oracles were more delu¬ 
sive than modern spiritualism, for science was in 
its infancy, and mythology confusing. Demoniacal 
possession was common. 

Satan, therefore, in prophetic language had been 
exalted to heaven; but his fall was at hand. Chris¬ 
tianity had been tested, and its power to shake the 
foundations of that vast system of evil that had 
flourished for unknown centuries was demonstrated. 
The fall of Satan from “heaven” meant the decline 
of his influence among world powers. When evil 
spirits are known, and their weakness and filthiness 
exposed, they are despised and sink into deeper 
degradation and contempt. 

That holy angels have fallen into temptation and 
lost their honors and privileges is understood. It 
93 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


is also certain that others may fall if they choose. 
There is no exalted state, here or hereafter, from 
which we may not descend into disgrace and in¬ 
famy. The power of choice can never be taken 
from us. 

Mythological ideas concerning the spiritual world 
still prevail among enlightened people. The typ¬ 
ical angel of the famous artist appears in ancient 
costume with feathery wings and a feminine 
countenance. Any combination of human and ani¬ 
mal forms is unreal, and should be so understood. 
Figures in heraldry, or on coins, are significant. 
They may represent the genius of nations. They 
are emblematic. The British lion, wearing a crown, 
and rampant, may roar when warlike sentiments 
prevail. The American eagle, with arrows in his 
claw, and expanded wings, may scream with patri¬ 
otic enthusiasm when a great victory is celebrated. 
So the argus-eyed “beasts,” or creatures, of the 
Apocalypse may praise God. And the six-winged 
seraphim, in the vision of Isaiah, cover their faces 
with their wings, and express the deepest devotion. 

It seems strange that a literal view of these 
scenic parables should be sanctioned. We may as 
well believe that Centaurs and wing-footed Mer- 
94 


ANGELS 


curys once lived, as to suppose that persons in the 
other world have bird-like wings. And, yet, poets 
and sculptors have so deeply impressed this concep¬ 
tion that it has become the common belief of many. 

The devils and deities of mythological times still 
survive, in spite of their extinction, and are ready 
for the magician and the dramatist. 

Gustave Dore has created uncanny hordes of 
genii with bat-like wings, and dark complexion, 
apparently neither men nor women, known as 
devils. Milton’s satan has wings. His ability to 
fly is astonishing. He can penetrate interplanetary 
space, for he is found in an obscure part of the 
Universe, and reaches our globe with evil intent. 
His size is colossal. He is “full many a rood in 
bulk,” and when enthroned may excite emotions 
of sublimity ( ?). 

“High on a throne of royal state, which far 
Outshone the wealth of Ormus or of Ind; 

Or where the gorgeous East with richest hand 
Showers on her Kings barbaric, pearl and gold, 

Satan exalted sat; by merit raised 
To that high eminence.” 18 

Milton’s license, as an imaginative poet, per¬ 
mitted him to reach unexplored heights and depths. 
The fall of the apostate angels from heaven con- 


18 Paradise Lost. Book II. 
95 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


tinued “nine days.” In an illustrated edition of his 
works they are seen descending, head foremost, hell- 
ward. 

The blending of fact and fancy by eminent 
authors in their poems and dissertations, on the 
invisible world, is becoming a thing of the past. 
Our age is practical. Speculative views on this 
subject are unpopular. Nor can we tolerate “rev¬ 
elations” unless they are consistent and sensible, 
bearing the unmistakable seal of divinity. 

The eschatology of Swedenborg when sifted 
exhibits a few grains of gold, but a journey through 
his hells is unprofitable. It does not pay to look 
for truth among so much rubbish. 

Immortality is a vital theme, and burning ques¬ 
tions gather around it. Our friends are on the 
other side. Life’s consummation is approaching 
and it involves our destiny. 

“So live that when thy summons comes to join 
That innumerable caravan, which moves 
To that mysterious realm, where each shall take 
His chamber in the silent halls of death; 

Thou go not like the quarry slave at night, 

Scourged £o his dungeon; but sustained and soothed 
By an unfaltering trust approach thy grave 
Like one who wraps the drapery of his couch 
About him, and lies down to pleasant dreams.” 19 


19 W. C. Bryant. 
96 



VII 

EXPRESSION IN THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 

Ideas are the foundations of all things. They 
are divine in their origin, and have had a progress¬ 
ive development. When organized and endued 
with forces they constitute nature. A man is an 
idea, composite and complex, having in himself the 
ability to produce, or appropriate, various thoughts. 

A new idea may be born in us, and begin with the 
embryo. It is interesting to study the process. 
The soul is fertile and full of latent germs which 
are developed by thinking. An idea appears in 
the depths of the mind as an infinitesimal shadow. 
It is vague and very obscure. It cannot be named, 
and yet it is something. We feel that it is rising 
and may be important. As it is nourished it begins 
to assume character and outline, and we can under¬ 
stand more about it. It is at length formulated 
imperfectly within. We may feel that it is crude 
97 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


and should be revised and considered, but when 
it is spoken, or written, for others, it is born. 

A thought that is difficult to express is like a 
plant trying to push through the ground and 
reach the surface. When trees that have an 
abundance of foliage are unfruitful there is some¬ 
thing defective in the conditions. Men have lived 
whose ideas were more valuable than any we can 
find in literature, but they could not give them to 
the world. Ability to reveal the best things is 
very rare; and those who have had success feel 
that they are deficient, because ideal expression 
means not only the clothing of valuable thoughts 
with appropriate verbiage, but the felicitous arrange¬ 
ment of sentences and collocation of phrases. 

If poetry is attempted how few are able to write 
verses that will not die. Music and the drama 
struggle with difficulties of expression. The great 
painters and sculptors leave their works unfinished. 
Their minds were crowded with a multitude of 
plans and noble conceptions which did not mate¬ 
rialize. 

Shakespeare’s works are not complete. The dia¬ 
monds of his genius glitter with transcendant 
lustre. The fire that burns in his tragedies kindles 



“Ability to Reveal the Best Things is Very Rare. 

Page 88. 









THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


an inextinguishable flame in the heart of humanity. 
Men read, and wonder, and weep. His sonnets 
are like the exquisite music of a dream. But his 
opportunities were limited, and his mind com¬ 
paratively immature. If he had lived to this day, 
with faculties unimpaired, a progressive man, his 
former efforts would seem to him juvenile, and 
even childish, when compared with later produc¬ 
tions. 

In this life we lay the foundations, and there is 
much digging to be done. The substructure is 
important, for it is permanent. It is so in nature. 
The Universe is eternal, but susceptible to change 
and perpetual progress. The wild apple tree can 
be cultivated and the original fruit altered in kind 
and quality, but a new tree is not created. As we 
are in the formative period we are earthy and 
undeveloped. We cannot reach the ideal though 
we aim high and find comparative success, for 
the building is not limited in its possibilities. It 
is to rise as high as heaven. The outlines are seen 
and the structure is begun, but the edifice is incom¬ 
plete. In imagination we may get a glimpse of 
its splendid columns and stately towers, “but it 
doth not yet appear what we shall be.” 


99 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


Expression is among the last things. It is the 
blossom and fruitage of life. It requires judg¬ 
ment and discrimination. Youth is too green, and 
age is not flexible and fervid. It is in the fulness 
of physical and mental capacity that it is best, 
and even then it is restricted by natural environ¬ 
ment. 

Words are the signs of ideas, and as sounds, or 
combinations of sounds, they represent thoughts; 
but they are often equivocal, the same word having 
a variety of meaning. Whether it is used in a 
literal or metaphorical sense and just what the au¬ 
thor meant may involve the study of his life and 
times, and then its exact signification may be doubt¬ 
ful. The fact that words are changing and often 
lose their original import, become obsolete, or vary 
in their use in different localities, should be consid¬ 
ered. 

The deluge of new words that has come in upon 
us during the last century is the result of mar¬ 
vellous advancement in science, invention, and dis¬ 
covery. The intercourse of nations arising from 
ability to reach the uttermost parts of the earth 
and study things new and old in the history, cus¬ 
toms, products, and literature of many races, have 


ioo 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


greatly enriched the vocabularies of civilized nations. 
Our dictionaries are becoming encyclopedic. The 
standard lexicon of forty years ago is superseded. 
New words are necessary, because the world is 
flooded with new ideas. 

The burial of thought under phrases that sound 
well, and strike the popular ear with favor, is 
still the vocation of the distinguished diplomat and 
the successful (?) lawyer. Legislators representing 
their constituents often find golden opportunities in 
the flexibility of verbal expression. 

There are but few persons who are well ac¬ 
quainted with their native tongue, which they have 
studied and spoken from childhood. They know 
the meaning of many words, but they find difficulty 
in using them. They cannot find the right word, 
or combination of words, at the right time. 

A man who can use three thousand different 
words, and readily turn them into appropriate 
phraseology, has a good vocabulary. But what 
are these compared with the tens of thousands 
which a modern language contains? If he ven¬ 
tures outside of this narrow sea of verbiage he 
must go slowly and take frequent soundings, or 
make shipwreck of speech. The same difficulty 

IOI 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


confronts the great genius who uses many thou¬ 
sands of words, but whose ideas are so numerous, 
original, and unique that he is handicapped by 
inability to find the proper combinations and un¬ 
lock the treasury of his soul. 

The expression of thought in the spiritual world 
does not depend upon audible sounds, for the 
physical voice is no longer needed, and cannot be 
used, because our entire being is then absolutely 
spiritual. Even now what we utter is formulated 
within before it is pronounced. This formulation 
may be imperfect, and we may not always be con¬ 
scious of it, but we can see that it occurs. If it 
did not the vocal organs would be independent of 
the mind. 

Spiritual beings are mental in their constitution, 
and, therefore, capable of penetrating all natural 
barriers, and exerting a pervasive influence on 
others which is not easily defined. It is like per¬ 
sonality in us, but it is much more effective and 
intelligible. They can speak in us without words. 
Their power to impress us is very great when we 
are susceptible, and look for revelations. Prayer 
may be simply an ardent desire for the best things 
from a divine source. It may be imperfectly ex- 


102 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


pressed even in thought, but it finds a distinct 
and intelligent response which is felt and can be 
easily interpreted. 

Reliable communication with human beings in 
the invisible state is not easy for us now, for our 
incorporeal nature is embryonic and seeks expres¬ 
sion through physical avenues. This causes mis¬ 
understanding and is not safe, unless there is 
special provision for it under divine direction. 
Messages have come through angels whose creden¬ 
tials have never been questioned by those who 
believe that we are immortal, but these heavenly 
men did not represent themselves. 

The efforts of infernal spirits who seek affinity 
in us are successful when they find curious and 
susceptible inquirers. Their ability to create im¬ 
pressions that are contrary to our interests, and 
lead us into fatal delusions, is acknowledged by 
those who believe that evil impulses may come 
from the other world. 

Expression has great advantages in the super¬ 
natural realm, for it can use all languages or none. 
Language is the vehicle of thought. It is the 
clothing of ideas. A Frenchman could converse 
easilv with an Arab if there were no difficulty 


103 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


about the signs of their ideas. The arbitrary 
sounds, and strange methods of representing what 
they would communicate, create misunderstanding. 

When an inspired writer, in former times, got 
a message he might find it in cipher, symbol, vision, 
or impressions, to be carefully studied that it might 
be comprehended, and mistakes avoided. He could 
then clothe it in the language indicated, or take 
it verbatim et literatim. 

If a person should speak a language previously 
unknown to him, and claim divine inspiration, he 
would have hearers who could understand him and 
his words would be important, or his claim could 
not be sustained, for this miracle of speech would 
involve a miracle of hearing. What was said 
would not be regarded as valuable, although remark¬ 
able as a phenomenon, unless there was some 
convincing revelation concerning its source for 
those who listened. 

Perception is as wonderful as expression in the 
life beyond. 

The susceptibility of the spiritual ear, when 
cultivated, is astonishing. The mysterious writing 
on the wall in the palace of Belshazzar, King of 
Babylon, at a great banquet, in the presence of a 
104 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


thousand distinguished guests, created a profound 
sensation because it was evidently supernatural. 1 
The influence exerted on the king at the same time 
is noticed. He turned pale and trembled, as if 
anticipating a dreadful calamity. Convulsed with 
terror, and frantic with alarm, he appealed to the 
ablest men in the kingdom for an immediate inter¬ 
pretation of those strange words written with spirit 
fingers. After desperate efforts it was found that 
no one could even read them. But there was a 
man in the palace who had not been called forward, 
whose spiritual perception was very keen and dis¬ 
criminating, for he had listened with close atten¬ 
tion to messages from the hidden world, and 
studied them with scrupulous care. His mind had 
been disciplined by very severe tests. His char¬ 
acter was unimpeachable, and his natural ability 
great. 

Daniel stood before the large audience of emi¬ 
nent persons and beheld the appalling anxiety of 
the king. He was calm and confident. As he read 
the burning words on the wall it was seen that they 
were without grammatical construction, or con¬ 
nection, isolated and unintelligible. As he trans- 


1 Daniel v. 

105 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


lated them there was breathless suspense. “Num¬ 
bering, Numbering, Weighing, Division.” They 
were in cipher, and there was no key, until certain 
thoughts associated with them were communicated. 
As he uttered them the entire assembly saw at once 
that he was right. 

For him was reserved the great privilege of 
hearing words distinctly spoken by a spiritual 
being, but this was not for the audience. They 
could hear, but not as he did. They perceived that 
he spoke the truth, but they did not hear the 
voice from the spiritual world. The king had 
heard and seen a message from the same source, 
but he was not honored by it. It was not clear, 
and he felt that it was unfavorable to him. 

On the Day of Pentecost there was a more 
remarkable expression of thoughts from the celes¬ 
tial state. 2 A sound from heaven “was heard” as 
of a rushing mighty wind, and the appearance of 
fire was seen, flashing in tongues of flame. As the 
Gallilean Christian began to speak they were un¬ 
derstood by the representatives of many foreign 
nations from distant parts of the world. They 
spoke in Syrochaldee with Gallilean vernacular, 


2 Acts ii. 
io 6 



THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


and it was noticed that they were using that lan¬ 
guage, which was an unknown tongue to these 
strangers in Jerusalem, and yet they all under¬ 
stood easily what was said, and felt that it was 
true; and that they were really taking thoughts 
unclothed with any language, and enjoyed for the 
time, the privileges of the spiritual heaven while 
in the mortal state. 

Audible sounds imply sensations caused by im¬ 
pressions upon the ear. If there is anything defec¬ 
tive in this delicate and complex organ, hearing 
is unsatisfactory or impossible, because the appro¬ 
priate sensations cannot be perceived. Now a 
sensation is a feeling, or a state produced by a 
thought as it appears in the mind. If we could 
not think we would not know whether we had 
heard anything or not; neither could we see, or 
feel, for we should be without a realizing sense of 
the facts. 

Therefore, if a person were absolutely deaf we 
could make him hear distinctly if we could produce 
sensations in him corresponding exactly to those 
which would reach him through the normal ear. 
This we are unable to do now, but it can be done 
very easily by spirits when the conditions are 
107 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


favorable, because they can make impressions 
directly, or reach us through avenues of our being 
that are now inaccessible to others. Sounds aris¬ 
ing from natural sources can be heard by them in 

the same way, for they have supermundane per- 
^' 

ceptibility. 

A voice from the other world is what the 
speaker is able to make it. If he speaks with the 
sound of a trumpet, “he that hath ears to hear*’ 
will notice a sound “as of a trumpet.” If he hears 
“the voice of harpers harping with their harps” he 
will know that this does not necessarily imply the 
use of material instruments, for they are not needed 
in the spiritual world. We use them because our 
resources are limited by natural environment. 

The maker of a musical instrument must be 
able to form an accurate conception of the sounds 
that can be produced by it when it is finished and 
ready for the musician. The director of an 
orchestra should know the capacity of each instru¬ 
ment he uses and its relation to others and the 
entire number, that he may detect anything that 
interferes with the effect of the music in general, 
and in all its details. He should be able also to 
correct errors and instruct the musicians. He has, 
108 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


therefore, the music of the orchestra in his mind, 
and if a capable leader can hear it when alone and 
express mentally every tone and variation, and see 
its proper note, as well as every combination and 
its effect, and hear the ideal concert he would give 
the audience, if successful. He could do the work 
of the whole band himself without instruments or 
audible sounds and make it much more real and 
effective if he were in the spiritual body and had 
an audience that could hear him. 

Hence, the great advantage of the spiritual over 
the corporeal mode of existence. 

If there came a sound “from heaven, as of a 
rushing mighty wind,” to the capable hearer, he 
could see at once that it was from a spiritual source; 
but this would not make it less real, but more so, 
because it would be clearly comprehended, and its 
purpose perceived, for it would be a sound which 
involved a thought, that defining it, obviated con¬ 
fusion or uncertainty. 

In nature there are uncertain sounds that cause 
perplexity. We must wait and investigate if we 
would know what they mean; but if one should 
hear a “voice from heaven as the voice of many 
waters” he would not understand that it was the 


109 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


sound of some vast, invisible ocean booming on 
its beach. If “seven thunders should utter their 
voices” he would not suppose that the sounds were 
associated with electrical phenomena, for he would 
see at once (if worthy of such manifestations) that 
these things were suggested by spiritual intelligences, 
having important facts to communicate, which were 
being deeply impressed by illustrations of ultra¬ 
mundane power. 

The expression of ideas under inspiration is very 
interesting and desirable to some people. There is 
a fascination about it that attracts those whose tastes 
lead them to an investigation of occult problems. 

That there is a kind of divine inspiration for all 
who earnestly seek it, is quite generally admitted. 
That we can be stimulated and strengthened, and 
have greater freedom and satisfaction in utterance, 
and feel a heavenly enthusiasm that is salutary and 
delightful, is not denied. But a higher degree, 
which would enable a person in these days to take 
thoughts, and even words, and give them to the 
world as divine ideas, coming through him, would 
seem too much for belief. And, indeed, it would be 
a great mistake to indorse such a one unless the 
evidences were incontrovertible. 


no 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


A divine being should certainly be able to furnish 
credentials acceptable to all reasonable persons 
when speaking in and through an earthly mes¬ 
senger. And there is no valid reason for supposing 
that inspiration from such a source, even in the 
highest degree, sustained by evidences of its genuine¬ 
ness that are incontrovertible, cannot be given in 
this age, if it were expedient, without superseding 
or conflicting with any writings of the kind that 
are extant. True revelation is progressive and 
there are new things for those who are able to 
receive them, and if the exigencies of the times 
demand them they will come and find hearers of 
the right kind. 

There are those who think that inspired writers 
in ancient times often found their predictions in¬ 
comprehensible to themselves and were not respon¬ 
sible for what they published, being simply the 
human recipients of that which was enigmatical to 
them as well as to those who received their proph¬ 
ecies. That they were highly organized and favored 
instruments through whom the Deity spoke, or 
wrote, and must wait possibly hundreds of years 
in heaven until their predictions were fulfilled before 
they could understand what they had expressed. 


hi 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


Some suppose that the hand of an inspired writer 
moved automatically, and that he did not use judg¬ 
ment, or discretion, in his work, but was simply 
an infallible amanuensis under spiritual control. 
Such conclusions have no foundation in fact. 
Nowhere are we taught by reliable inspiration or 
common sense that we are to be tools in the hands 
of God. He is the superhuman teacher, acting in, 
and with, the susceptible pupil who has been care¬ 
fully prepared for his work by the development 
and discipline of all his faculties under divine tuition 
which has brought him into a union with his heav¬ 
enly Counsellor which makes their interests mutual. 
He is willing to be led in his thoughts, and listen 
to suggestions concerning matters of his own which 
the Spirit may use; for all his resources are valuable, 
including his personality and natural endowments, 
as well as acquired knowledge and ability. 

Fie must be able to carefully discriminate and 
know the voice of his Teacher under all circum¬ 
stances, even of the most perplexing nature. For, 
as soon as he is open to the spiritual world in this 
degree, he is exposed to influences of many kinds 
that are new and dangerous. He may become a 
target for malignant spirits who are opposed to his 


112 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


purposes who will attack him furiously. If they 
cannot distract or intimidate they may simulate and 
suggest incessantly for a while, and cannot be 
withstood without great firmness, keen spiritual 
perception, and strong confidence in the Guide. 

Pie who enters this realm must also guard against 
interpolations springing from his own mind which 
may seem appropriate, but are not to be used in 
the inspired message, every word of which is to 
be weighed and studied and comprehended, and 
possibly revised, and lastly, sealed without doubt 
by divine approval. 

It is evident that very few people are qualified 
for such important work. There must be unusual 
delicacy and receptivity, as well as heroic courage 
and invincible purpose; and yet, such flexibility of 
the will, and intelligent interest and sympathy that 
desirable shades of thought and feeling can be 
expressed. 

The expression of ideas from the spiritual world 
that are valuable is very difficult for the beginner, 
because the conditions are so hard to understand. 
And, yet, there have been periods in history when 
there was open vision, and messages from angels, 
and even from God, were not uncommon. We 
“3 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


may suppose that these people of former ages were 
more highly favored in this respect than ourselves, 
for special reasons, and that such revelations cannot 
be expected in modern times, and it would be 
presumptuous to look for them. If there was 
greater need of such manifestations then than there 
is now, there is a reason for their occurrence that 
is worthy of consideration; but who can show that 
there is no opportunity for them in this age? 

The student of prophecy was a learner from 
childhood. He might struggle for years before he 
could get an intelligible communication, and then 
wait much longer before he could be recognized 
by those who were capable of testing its value. 
Evolution is a law of our being which cannot be 
ignored. The best things come slowly, under pres¬ 
sure and resistance. The great painter spoils much 
canvas before his ideal picture is ready for exhibi¬ 
tion. This law of gradual development reaches 
through and into the infinite heights of the super¬ 
natural realm. It should not discourage those who 
believe that to them it is given to know the mysteries 
of the spiritual kingdom. 

Inspiration of a heavenly type is celestial fire 
glowing in the life. It often rises into rapture in 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


utterance. It is not without danger to its fortunate 
possessor. The best things are often associated 
with the worst. There is but a step between truth 
and error, or, from the sublime to the ridiculous. 

The courage that is kindled, and the feeling of 
satisfaction in expression, may lead to a “holy 
recklessness” which is disastrous to its victim. 

If the ecstasy does not subside the erratic ways 
and extravagant assertions may continue, for they 
are connected with a subtle fallacy which is covered 
by the sense of divine approval which he feels. 

He is sincere. His faith is strong and his 
loyalty to his Inspirer unquestionable. His desire 
to be right in everything is intense. He cannot, 
therefore, be justly condemned until he is able to 
see his mistake. If he should lose the sense of 
divine favor while firmly believing in his own sin¬ 
cerity and the righteousness of his ways and doings, 
he would fall into confusion and distress without 
being able to see the reasons for it. 

He may be deluded with the idea that he is 
sustained in his idiosyncrasies, and is not respon¬ 
sible for his unseemly peculiarities. He may think 
that he is not understood by those who object to 
his methods. He may resolve to persist even if he 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


becomes a martyr to his convictions, and, for a 
while, see nothing against his course. He is 
immature. Light will come as he can bear it. He 
will find in time, if honest with himself, that he is 
losing his influence among sincere and thoughtful 
people, and will prayerfully consider the reasons 
for it, and find light and use it, unless there is some 
congenital defect or natural weakness in his facul¬ 
ties which could not be remedied without a miracle, 
which he could not understand or appreciate. In 
this case he would not do much harm, for the 
sphere of his influence would be limited. 

The career of William Miller, the distinguished 
founder of the sect known as “Adventists,” affords 
an example of a sincere and earnest student of 
prophecy whose convictions were positive and clear 
to himself, as well as many others, when he pre¬ 
dicted the “end of the world” as he understood it, 
and limited the time. In 1831 he arose from 
his long study deeply impressed with the solemn 
conviction that to him had been given the key that 
would unlock mystical numbers, “and that he must 
go forth and proclaim to a doomed world that in 
twelve years, at the longest, the end of all things 
would come.” 


THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


His lectures were illustrated by charts on which 
were represented the apocalyptic “beasts,” and 
Nebuchadnezzar’s image. They presented a mathe¬ 
matical demonstration of the mystical problem of 
the 2300 days of Daniel’s vision, showing just 
when the “third woe” would come, and the seventh 
trumpet sound, and the “stone cut out of the moun¬ 
tain” would smite the great image, and Christ would 
appear in the clouds. 

The salient point of the argument was the con¬ 
nection between the seventy weeks of Daniel, and 
the two thousand three hundred days of his vision, 
and in this was the revelation of the “exact time” 
of the end. The awful consummation was to occur 
in 1844, between the 24th and 25th of October. 
“The tenth day of the 7th month.” He admitted 
a mistake in fixing first upon the year 1843, because 
he had not considered the difference between Roman 
and Jewish time. The clue had been found in the 
fact that the tenth day of the seventh month was 
also that of the great day of Atonement. Then 
came a period of great excitement among the 
believers which did not subside until the months of 
October and November had passed serenely. Then 
there was great relief for those who were alarmed, 
11 7 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


and disappointment, conflicting discussion, and col¬ 
lapse in the ranks of the disciples. 3 

Still Mr. Miller was hopeful, and in April, 1845, 
called a convention of his followers and instituted 
a church, which does not seem to be disturbed by 
the failure in his predictions. And it is not reason¬ 
able for us to think that his efforts were useless 
and unwise because he was not correct in his inter¬ 
pretation after years of study and effort. 

The law of progress in the search for knowledge 
of the supernatural realm has its counterpart in the 
physical world. 

The great conquerors of former ages built empires 
on the ruins of nations subdued in bloody battles. 
History glories in their achievements, and writes 
their names high on the scroll of fame. But the 
sphere of their conquests was limited by obstacles 
in nature that could not be overcome. 

When Alexander had reached the interior of 
India, his troops still victorious, absolutely refused 
to go any further. They realized the great dis¬ 
tance from their native land and the perils they 
must encounter as they returned. They were not 

8 See Appleton’s “Cyclopaedia of American Biography.” 
Yol. iv. 



THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


unreasonable in their apprehensions. The long and 
exhausting march through burning deserts and 
swollen streams, in countries wasted by war, famine, 
and pestilence, decimated their ranks and left them 
weak when the great general reached Babylon to 
celebrate his victories. 

Rome was called the mistress of the world, but 
there were regions beyond the Danube, the Indus, 
and the stupendous Himalaya Mountains, that 
defied invasion, while the Sahara, that great inland 
sea of sand, protected Southern Africa. 

Napoleon could not conquer the climate of 
Russia. When his army of 500,000 men, the 
flower of the youth of France and allied nations, 
left the burned and deserted city of Moscow, the 
frozen corpses of thousands of men and horses 
covered snowy leagues of the immense plains on 
the homeward journey. The awful disaster on the 
icy Beresina left only about 25,000 men when he 
reached Paris. 

There has been no barrier in nature so forbidding 
and overwhelming in its resistance as the mighty 
and apparently limitless Ocean. The ancient mari¬ 
ner coming to the gates of Hercules thought he 
had reached the end of the world. And so, for 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


unrecorded ages, one-half of the population of the 
globe was ignorant concerning the other. 

When, in recent centuries, the daring explorer 
returned to speak of continents and islands hitherto 
unknown, but few cared to be pioneers in those 
seemingly fabulous regions. Even in Byron’s day 
the Ocean was a king of terrors. 

“The armaments which thunder strike the walls 
Of rock-built cities, bidding nations quake 
And monarchs tremble in their capitals. 

The oak leviathans whose huge ribs make 
Their clay creator the vain title take 
Of lord of thee, and arbiter of War. 

These are thy toys, and as the snowy flake 
They melt into thy yeast of waves which mar 
Alike the Armada’s pride or spoils of Trafalgar .” 4 

The era of steam and electricity has robbed the 
ocean of its former primacy in the domain of 
mystery and destruction. The modern steamship 
will compare favorably in safety and swiftness with 
the best means of conveyance on the land. And the 
vision of St. John concerning the new heaven and 
earth in this respect will soon be fulfilled, for 
practically there will be “no more sea.” 


4 Byron’s “Apostrophe to the Ocean.” 


120 



THE SPIRITUAL WORLD 


The great trans-continental railways, with their 
connections, are penetrating in every direction. 
News comes speedily from all quarters of the 
globe; and there will be an opportunity for some 
great nation, or combination of powers, to form 
a central government and control the whole world. 

Those dismal spots in utmost latitudes, where 
eternal winter reigns, have stimulated the curiosity 
of thoughtful persons for many years. They must 
soon yield their gloomy secrets to the intrepid 
explorer, which will be of little value, but will 
satisfy the longing of the human heart for that 
which has been forever hidden. 

The control of the forces of nature, by those 
interested in universal progress, has met with 
unparalleled success in recent years, because there 
has been a profound study of the possibilities of 
these forces, and the laws that govern them. If 
efforts as wise and persistent were made by those 
who are longing for a more satisfactory knowledge 
of the spiritual world they would not be dis¬ 
appointed. The golden age of open vision, with 
corresponding expression, would dawn upon us in 
ways more wonderful than any the past has afforded. 


121 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


because progress has prepared the world for better 
things of this kind. And these things would be 
acceptable to the most sincere and worthy persons, 
for they would be understood and their Source 
recognized. 


122 


VIII 

TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 

The transition from the natural to the celestial 
state does not necessarily involve physical death. 
There are modes of exit more desirable. They 
have been used in the past, and when it is expedient 
they will be available . 1 

The advantage derived from death and decay 
in the animal and vegetable kingdoms is very great, 
for the earth’s covering of vegetable mould, 
mingled with animal and mineral matter, is the 
source and nourishing mother of terrestrial life. 
Marine animals might exist, but the land without 
the soil would be an uninhabitable desert. 

In some way the growth that springs from the 
soil must be removed. If it were not limited to 
a period for development and decline, it would 
form a tangled mass of gigantic trees and shrub- 


'Heb. xi. 5. 
123 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


bery of all varieties, unrestricted in the primeval 
forests by anything but the want of sunlight in 
its awful depths, and nourishment at the roots. 
It might reach miles in height if the climatic con¬ 
ditions were favorable and it were not disturbed 
by the hand of man; but it would finally fail, 
checked by exhaustion and the struggle for room. 
It must eventually die, for life could not be sus¬ 
tained perpetually under such conditions. 

The removal of this immense accumulation of 
dead and dying material would then be difficult. 
Spontaneous combustion might occur, resulting in 
conflagrations dreadful beyond conception, heating 
the surface of the earth to such a depth that the 
germs of life would be destroyed, necessitating new 
creations for which the soil would not be prepared. 
If vegetation were changed by some process that 
would cause it to disappear without leaving a per¬ 
ceptible remainder the ground would lack its nour¬ 
ishment, and men and animals their sustenance. 

The possibility of death in the animal kingdom 
is a fortunate thing, because its makes flesh avail¬ 
able for us, and the countless varieties of life, on 
land and in the sea, that require animal food. 

The decomposition of defunct forms, including 
124 


TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


vast swarms of infinitesimal insects, and micro¬ 
scopic organisms, is essential to the formation of 
fertile soil; for the earth is carnivorous. It con¬ 
sumes billions of tons of animal substance, and 
cannot be sustained by a diet which is exclusively 
vegetable, for there is a drain upon its vitality that 
requires strong and stimulating resources. Agri¬ 
culturalists are looking for compounds in which 
bone and flesh products are not lacking. They 
realize that they cannot get the best results unless 
the ground is fed with the most nutritious elements. 

Such is the plan or constitution of nature and 
the corresponding relation of available forces that 
she is self-supporting. Her riches are cumulative. 
She grows more wealthy with the lapse of ages, 
and has now abundance in reserve for the great 
populations of the future. 

The luxuriant vegetation of those epochs in the 
dim and unknown past, when the earth was tropical 
from the equator to the poles, has left its evidences 
in the everlasting rocks. It was associated with 
a development in natural forms that is amazing 
as we consider the fossilized remains of those ages, 
incomprehensible in duration. Those were the 
times of preparation for what we now enjoy, in 
125 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


which mundane bones were clothed with cosmic 
flesh. 2 The colossal mammalia, and amphibious 
monsters whose stony skeletons have been un¬ 
earthed, constituted only a part of the multitudinous 
life that swarmed in the sea, and crowded the land, 
living and dying, in such vast numbers for millions 
of years, that they form to-day an important part 
of the alluvial floor on which the nations walk. 

Humanity has contributed its share to the pro¬ 
ductive forces of the soil by returning the mortal 
part to the earth from which it was taken. The 
terraqueous globe has become an ancient cemetery 
rich in human ingredients. Burial six feet deep 
in protected spots was not common in ancient times, 
and is not now the general method in many regions, 
vast in extent, and densely populated. Myriads 
have been swept away by war, famine, pestilence, 
fire, and flood, and casualties of every kind. 

The number of inhabitants has been large in 
favorable localities for many centuries, and many 
parts that are now thinly peopled were once full 
of life. If the estimated population of the world 
is 1,400,000,000 and about 100,000 die every day, 
we can see with William Cullen Bryant that: 


3 The globe would be a skeleton without the soil. 
126 



TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 

“All that tread the globe are but a handful to the tribes 
That slumber in its bosom—Take the wings 
Of morning, pierce the Barcan wilderness 
Or lose thyself in the continuous woods, 

Where rolls the Oregon, and hears no sound 
Save its own dashings—Yet the dead are there; 

And millions in those solitudes since first 
The flight of years began, have laid them down 
In their last sleep.” 

The disappearance of a person from the world 
without dying is a phenomenon so mysterious and 
improbable that it could not be accepted as a fact, 
unless there were examples in history so well 
authenticated by credible witnesses that suspicion 
concerning their veracity could not be entertained 
by reasonable people. The case of Enoch, the 
seventh from Adam, was so clear that it was not 
doubted when it occurred, or hundreds of years 
afterward when reference was made to the event 
by an inspired writer. 3 It appears that this way 
out of the natural form was considered a great 
privilege which but few could obtain. 

A passage out of the earthly condition that 
would not involve corruption was coveted in former 
times. And to-day there are many thoughtful 
people who shrink from the contemplation of their 


8 Gen. v. 24; Heb. xi. 
127 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


bodies lying in the ground for an indefinite period, 
subject to the most repulsive and disgusting trans¬ 
formations, leaving at length a mass of putrescent 
filth in which a skeleton is submerged. 

Hence, the growing favor with which incinera¬ 
tion is regarded. It seems to relieve the mind, 
dispelling those gloomy forebodings that are really 
without foundation, for it cannot be shown that 
a person in the other world has any more interest 
in his fleshly remains than one in this life who has 
lost a limb by amputation. Probably he would 
not care whether it were cremated, or buried with 
ceremonies, for he would feel that it was of no 
consequence to him, not being a part of himself 
of any value, but simply refuse matter. 

A change that would not affect a person unfavor¬ 
ably in any' respect, but would, while in a perfectly 
normal condition, gently, but suddenly and glo¬ 
riously, release the spirit, and at the same time 
instantaneously resolve the natural body into invis¬ 
ible and absolutely imperceptible substance, would 
be the ideal passage into that divine state of exist¬ 
ence which is the heritage of those who are 
qualified for it. 

This would imply very careful preparation for 
128 


TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 

the event, and a knowledge of the time when it 
would occur that could be communicated to chosen 
witnesses, whose statements would be accepted 
without doubt by the relatives and friends of the 
departed. For there is nothing that would create 
more alarm, or suspicion in a community, or nation, 
especially if the missing person were well known, 
or distinguished by superior ability and moral 
greatness. Such a change would seem miraculous 
to us unless we were acquainted with some process 
in nature that would make it possible, when the 
conditions were fulfilled. 

Life in human beings and animals is sustained 
by a kind of combustion. The normal tempera¬ 
ture of a person is about ninety-eight degrees. 
If it rises a little higher, or sinks lower, disease 
or danger is indicated. Now this oxygenous fire 
that burns perpetually in the system can be sud¬ 
denly intensified, under divine suggestion, without 
disagreeable sensations, thus producing an invisible 
conflagration that will instantly consume the body 
without leaving any evidences of its salutary work. 

The vision associated with the translation of 
Elijah is important because it is very suggestive. 
Elisha, his pupil, was stimulated by a condition 
129 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


which he must fulfill or he could not have the 
desire of his heart—a double portion of his master’s 
spirit. He must see Elijah as he was taken away . 
It was necessary for him to be very careful lest 
anything should escape his attention, for the vision 
was a privilege granted to him only, because he 
was the only one among the many prophets who 
was able to perceive it, ranking as he did next to 
Elijah in ability to understand divine revelations. 

Fifty selected men stood at a distance. They 
knew that Elijah was about to be removed in a 
mysterious way, and were profoundly impressed 
by the fact, which had come to them from a heav¬ 
enly source. They noticed, also, that he had sud¬ 
denly disappeared, but they did not see what 
Elisha saw—the hery horses and flaming chariot. 
These were very significant. They formed an 
object lesson which was stamped forever upon his 
mind. 

Elisha knew more about the event than he 
expressed, when inquiry was made concerning this 
marvelous phenomenon. He simply made his state¬ 
ment as a witness and left his hearers to their 
reflections. They were not convinced, and organ¬ 
ized a band of experienced men, who scoured the 
130 


TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


country for miles, in all directions, and after three 
days were ready to accept what he had said, which 
was the result he expected. 4 

The study of transcendental themes that are 
unknowable, and can be considered only theoreti¬ 
cally, resulting in a variety of speculative views, 
has always been unprofitable. Moreover, it is con¬ 
trary to the spirit and genius of the present age. 
But when our attention is called to some remark¬ 
able transformation, through which human beings 
have passed, and we realize that we are soon to 
experience changes full of vital interest, and we 
are urged, as in the example of Elijah and Enoch, 
to carefully notice the conditions and details , and 
are invited by divine intimations to investigate and 
satisfy ourselves concerning their reality, and the 
great privileges with which they are connected, we 
have reason to believe that we can know more 
about them, and that we should have clearer light 
because it is for us; and such knowledge is to be 
obtained in this life. 

The Bible is not a book written for the instruc¬ 
tion and edification of beings in the other world. 
It is not reasonable for us to suppose that things 


4 II. Kings. Ch. ii. 

131 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


would be given in a divine record for us about 
which we are not expected to have a satisfactory 
understanding. We are not to simply look at a 
sublime truth clothed in heavenly metaphor, or 
spiritual symbolism, and admire its imagery, glory¬ 
ing in the idea that we have no intelligible com¬ 
prehension of its meaning, and do not expect to 
have it “here below,” feeling sure that others 
never will in this life. 

Of course there are many things that we cannot 
know without experience; but there is much con¬ 
cerning the nature of that experience through 
which we are to pass that we can know, and should 
know, that we may be prepared to enter into it. 

Therefore, when our attention is arrested by a 
truth, made impressive by an exclamatory sentence, 
as: “Behold, I show you a mystery!” we can see 
while there is something deep and difficult to 
understand, that it is not so far beyond us that 
we cannot pierce its nebulosity and resolve it into 
something definite and valuable. Not only because 
we can view it in the light of science and sound 
logic, but with the telescopic eye of faith, thus 
securing divine illumination. 

The “mystery” is wrapped in the next sentence: 


132 


TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


“We shall not all sleep; but we shall all be 
changed.” 5 What is that singular “sleep” to which 
frequent reference is made by the same writer ? 6 
Is it simply death in a physical sense? The word 
“sleep” may be used metaphorically to denote 
repose in the tomb. But the corrupt and disinte¬ 
grated corporeal body is never aroused. It hears 
nothing and knows nothing. It becomes a part of 
the earth, and remains forever as such. 7 

If anything is made clear in this celebrated 
chapter, it is the nature of the body in which the 
dead appear. 8 For Paul answers the questions: 
“How are the dead raised up, and with what body 
do they come?” His definitions are accurate. He 
calls it a “spiritual body ” He carefully discrim¬ 
inates between the spiritual and the natural body, 
and positively affirms that in the spiritual body 
there is nothing “earthly.” “Flesh and blood” are 
entirely excluded. He also shows the folly of sup¬ 
posing that the corrupt old body in the ground 
inherits an incorruptible or spiritual body. It 
inherits nothing. 9 Nothing is ever done with it. 
It belongs to the earth from which it was built. 

•I. Cor. xv. 51. 8 Paul. T Gen. iii. 19. 

• I. Cor. xv. 9 1 . Cor. xv. 50. 

133 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The changes through which the natural body of 
Jesus Christ passed, while in the tomb of Joseph, 
should be considered, that we may have a clearer 
conception of the nature of the body in which he 
afterward “appeared”) for all his interviews with 
his friends after his death were regarded by them 
as appearances. They were really manifestations 
of his spiritual or resurrection body, to which he 
called their attention, desiring that they should 
know as much about it as possible. To them he 
seemed to be a “spirit” because he suddenly ap¬ 
peared, sometimes when doors were closed, and as 
quickly disappeared. He would be absent for a 
number of days and then appear on a fitting occa¬ 
sion. He could also change his form and conceal 
his identity for a while, when it served his purpose, 
and then reveal himself. 10 

The clothing he wore after his death was not 
of a material kind. The soldiers had taken his 
garments when he was crucified. The fine linen 
in which his mortal body had been wrapped when 
he was buried, was carefully removed and placed 
where his disciples could see it when they visited 
the empty tomb. 


10 Mark xvi. 12. 
134 



TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


He had no visible place of abode, and in every 
respect he resembled a being from the other world. 
But there was something in his presence very 
tangible, and apparently corporeal, to which he 
invited their attention and inspection. He said: 
“A spirit hath not flesh, and bones, as ye see me 
have/’* He ate in their presence and showed them 
the prints of the nails in his hands. 11 

His transformation in the tomb must have been 
similar in some respects to the change in Enoch 
and Elijah, but very different in others, for it 
involved a restoration of the natural body followed 
by a celestial translation. The body thus evolved 
was capable of manifestations never before exhibited. 
Before his death he could be transfigured, and 
thus assume the image of the heavenly. After his 
death he was able to reverse this phenomenon, and 
appear like one of us when he wished, to illustrate 
the reality of the life beyond the tomb? 

He could also vanish instantaneously, to show that 
it is a spiritual state having advantage far superior 
to any that the most favored of earth enjoy. We 
can, therefore, confidently believe, and rejoice in 
the fact, that we “believe in the resurrection of 


* See note, p. 147. 


135 


“Luke xxiv. 36-43. 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


the body” (meaning the spiritual body) without 
dinging to that erroneous view which would put 
us again into corporeal forms, which necessarily 
implies limitation and vulnerability. 12 

Job’s desire to see God while in the flesh had 
reference to his vindication and restoration to 
former health, when he should have clearer views 
of divine Providence. He did not believe that his 
dreadful disease would prove fatal. 13 If, however, 
there are those who think that Job’s language 
expresses a prediction and hope of a future reincar¬ 
nation they need not be disappointed in their 
expectations, for we have seen that Christ was 
able to transfigure his spiritual body when it was 
expedient, and makes it seem natural to his disciples; 
and as He is in this respect, so we may be. 

Resurrection means restoration, rebuilding, or 
raising, of the same person. It does not involve a 
new creation. The spiritual person, or body, begins 
to live when we are born. The mind, which is the 
spiritual nature, develops with the physical form, 
but it is very immature when the earthly body is 
old and ready to die, because it is the immortal 
part, and has unlimited possibilities. This is a 

12 See Ch. i., p. 9. 13 Job xix. 26. See R. V. 

136 



TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


matter of consciousness. A man advanced in life, 
when in a normal condition, feels that he has had 
experience and is prepared to live much longer, 
and do better in his enterprises. 

The transition at death may involve a period 
of repose, for the spiritual person is still embryonic 
in some respects. He is unclothed and is to be 
“clothed upon.” 14 He is in a new world, and 
must gradually become accustomed to his super¬ 
natural environment, and know his powers and 
privileges, by experience. This period of rest is 
full of blessedness when the foundations have been 
laid in righteousness, and the culture of heavenly 
character. It is by no means a state of uncon¬ 
sciousness, or slumber, in the tomb. It is a period 
of preparation for better things, and a more 
glorious awakening when new spheres of activity 
and enjoyment are open. 

We begin in a new way on the other side. 
Some time is usually required for development, 
and the acquisition of knowledge that cannot be 
obtained in this life; but a good man loses nothing. 
“To die is gain” for him. He rejoices in all he 
has that is worthy, and in all he is able to receive, 


14 II. Cor. v. 
137 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


but he may, for a while, rest, or wait that he may 
be prepared for those celestial activities which 
mean promotion desirable, and superlatively glo¬ 
rious. 15 

In biblical expression this time of waiting is 
called “sleep,” and there is such a distinct refer¬ 
ence to this idea, and the condition it implies when 
it relates to the invisible state, that its mystery 
should be explored. 

When we learn, as believers, that “we shall not 
all sleep” it is evident that there are some excep¬ 
tions, though it is certain that “we shall all be 
changed,” and that the change will be sudden. 

Sleep is used metaphorically by ancient, as weil 
as modern, authors, to represent death of a physical 
kind, and it is appropriate, for such sleep is the 
image of death. But there was a special reason 
for its use in the passage: “She is not dead; but 
sleepeth” 16 And there was also a reason for the 
statement: “Our friend, Lazarus, sleepeth, but I 
go that J make awake him out of, sleep.” In both 
instances the speaker was misunderstood at the 
time, and possibly there is some misunderstanding 
concerning his statements now. Spiritual repose, 


“Rev. vi. 9-11. 


Luke viii. 52-53; John xi. n-14. 
138 



TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


not death, is clearly indicated, for the discrimina¬ 
tion in this respect is unmistakable. “He said unto 
them plainly, ‘Lazarus is dead.’ ” 17 

It appears that we have in these instances illus¬ 
trations of that state of felicity which came to 
many persons immediately after death, from which 
some were miraculously awakened, or called back 
to the earthly life to remain for a while; but 
others were left “asleep in Jesus,” serenely reposing 
in hope, waiting for the moment when they should 
suddenly emerge from comparative inactivity and 
obscurity to conspicuous honors and privileges. 
This “sleep” did not necessarily involve uncon¬ 
sciousness, or correspond literally to what we call 
sleep. It was celestial repose. 

For some the period of retirement was not 
essential. They could enter at once into the 
employments of the seraphic life, and assume its 
responsibilities. The change for them involved no 
delay. 

The reasons for this rapid promotion are not 

17 Those who suppose that Christ spoke metaphorically or 
meant to disguise his words or embellish them with a figure 
of speech, should examine these passages more carefully. He 
spoke so plainly in one instance that “they laughed him to 
scorn.” He revealed an important fact. 

139 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


given, but they are implied. The spirituality, or 
openness, of some persons to the other world is 
remarkable; their ability to receive impressions, and 
acquire knowledge of divine things, is exceptional. 
If their firmness and loyalty under severe disci¬ 
pline and fiery trial, has revealed the gold of 
character thoroughly refined in brightness and 
purity, their readiness for sudden advancement is 
recognized. 

The raising of the dead, or their coming forth 
from their graves, or the sea, cannot be under¬ 
stood in a literal sense, for they do not live in the 
ground, in the sea, or “under the earth.” 18 These 
expressions are figurative, and simply refer to the 
world of the dead, and have no significance that 
concerns their mortal remains which do not enter 
into the constitution of the body raised or built, 
for it is a spiritual structure, to be clothed with 
immortality. 

Christ, our example in all things that pertain 
to resurrection life, enjoyed a brief period of 
heavenly repose. He became “the first fruits of 
them that slept.” This was not necessary for 
Him, but was used as an illustration, as was His 


“I. Cor. xv. si. Rev. xx. 13. 
140 



TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


baptism. His earthly temple, as Fie predicted, was 
destroyed, but He was able to build it again in 
three days, but not with natural substance, for He 
was “changed,” and appeared after His death in 
the celestial temple which His disciples saw and 
examined, and were then ready to state the facts 
and describe its marvelous possibilities. Truly 
there are reasons for the satisfaction of those 
who “awake in His likeness.” 

The resurrection, or exaltation, of a spiritual 
being after death means transfiguration, or change 
in appearance. This change implies something 
better, or worse, for the one who passes through 
it, for there is a resurrection “unto life,” but there 
is one that involves a deeper death. 19 

The appearance of a person in the spiritual 
world cannot be disguised in such a way as to 
effectually conceal moral corruption. Satan may 
appear as an angel of light among those who do 
not discriminate, because they cannot, or will not, 
understand what is clearly discerned on the other 
side of the grave. Transformation, therefore, may 
imply deterioration in presence, disgusting and 
horrible beyond conception. Character leaves its 


18 John v. 29. 
141 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


indelible marks on the features, easily interpreted 
by the acute observer, especially when maturity is 
reached, and the ruling motives have crystallized 
into definite attributes. 

The transformation of the natural appearance 
reveals the power of mind over matter, and it is 
more effective in youth than in age, because the 
body is more susceptible to its controlling and 
moulding influences. The transition from youth to 
manhood, or womanhood, is the most remarkable 
and interesting in its effect upon the form and 
features of any that comes into this life. When 
it is normal there is a development in the figure, 
and a forcefulness in the tones of the voice, and in 
the entire bearing, that indicates virility, and the 
most attractive manifestations of stalwart manli¬ 
ness. Sexuality is stamped upon the entire being, 
and all the predominating qualities that constitute 
manhood are apparent. The change from girl¬ 
hood to womanly maturity is equally important. 
It is noticed in the symmetry of the form, and 
brilliancy of the eye. All the feminine character¬ 
istics become prominent. There is with humanity, 
as in all nature, a period of efflorescence, an age 
of blossom and beauty. 


142 


TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


When the time for decline has come nothing 
can arrest the progress of decay but complete 
renewal. If this were repeated at proper intervals 
physical life could be sustained perpetually; but a 
person would be liable to casualties of many kinds 
which might prove fatal, or leave him maimed and 
mutilated. If he could be miraculously restored, 
even then the advantages of the spiritual state 
would make it far more desirable. 

When life has been supernaturally prolonged 
there were reasons for it that made divine inter¬ 
vention possible. Moses died a young man at the 
age of one hundred and twenty years. His eye 
was as clear, and his step as firm and elastic as 
at twenty-five. This was a mark of distinction 
and favor granted to a man whose worthiness and 
devotion were unparalleled. It came also in an 
age when miracle of this kind was needed. It 
involved physical transfiguration . His vitality was 
renewed in such a way that his bodily vigor and 
intellectual force suffered no decline. His radiant 
face was at times so dazzling that he was obliged 
to veil it when he came before the people. His 
luminous features indicated a development of the 
immortal body within that was truly abnormal, but 
i43 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


intensely glorious. The possibilities of the heavenly 
life were seen in this great man who had com¬ 
muned with the Divine Being forty days and 
nights on a lonely mountain height, and light was 
thrown upon the mystery of angelic existence. 

There is a question concerning the disposition 
of his body after his death that has never been 
answered. It is certain that it was not buried by 
human hands. His friends understood that he was 
dead, but they could not find his body. It is said 
God buried him, or he was buried. Let the reader 
form his own conclusions. It may be that his 
flesh did not see corruption. 20 

The heavenly resurrection, or elevation, of a 
person in the spiritual world should not be asso¬ 
ciated with that kind of resurrection which means 
simply the restoration to physical life of one 
recently dead. Erroneous and confusing impres¬ 
sions have come from a superficial study of such 
miracles. The raising of the prostrate form of 
Lazarus in the tomb is something very different 
from the building of the spiritual temple eternal 
in the heavens. 

Christ will indeed “change, or transfigure,” the 

20 Deut. xxxiv. 6. 

144 



TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


body of our humiliation that it may be conformed 
to the body of his glory. He will make it spiritual 
like his own; but this will not involve the exertion 
of divine forces upon the vile remains in the earth, 
for there is no reference to such a work in this 
connection, but to the natural living body, with 
its weakness, limitations, and susceptibility to 
decay. 21 

The temporary resurrection of the dead made a 
profound impression upon an age when immortality 
was mythical to thoughtful and conservative people. 
It startled the world and laid the foundation for 
better things. 

The transfiguration of a person in the spiritual 
world is the result of the gradual unfolding of his 
inner being. It is instantaneous, but the prepara¬ 
tion for it may occupy an indefinite period. It is 
not easy for us to tell just when a bud will blossom, 
but we can approximate quite accurately when we 
are well acquainted with the conditions. The laws 
that govern spiritual development are more com¬ 
plex in their operation, for they may fluctuate 
under varying circumstances, being dependent upon 
the will, as well as the intelligence, together with 


21 Phil. iii. 21. R. V. 
145 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


numerous other considerations that make predic¬ 
tions concerning the time for some great transfor¬ 
mation very difficult. 

The change that comes to one who is looking 
for a clear evidence of regenerating power in his 
nature from a divine source is sudden, although 
it may not seem to be so at the time in every 
instance. He passes from a condition known as 
moral death into spiritual life, and is generally 
conscious of the transition, which marks an era in 
his history; but the preparation for it was gradual. 
It may have occupied months, and even years, or 
a few moments. 

Degrees of advancement that come later are 
preceded by varying seasons of preparation and 
development, and it is not always easy to account 
for such variations. When, however, a person is 
sincere and wisely persistent there may be some 
delay arising from his inability to comprehend or 
apprehend, which nothing but time can relieve. 
These conditions have their counterpart in the 
immortal state, for heavenly resurrection is celestial 
efflorescence. 

The temporary bloom of youth and beauty is 
the figure of that which is to come. The radiant 
146 


TRANSLATION AND TRANSFIGURATION 


faces of angels grow brighter; their eyes become 
more expressive; their brilliant apparel has a lan¬ 
guage of its own. Its changes illustrate varying 
shades of thought and emotion in the rapturous 
life beyond. 

“I know not, O I know not 
What social joys are there; 

What radiancy of glory 
What light beyond compare.”” 


NOTE ON CELESTIAL FLESH AND BONES. 

The celestial body of Christ is substantial and clearly 
perceptible to the senses when they are open. It is tangible 
and apparently corporeal. But there is nothing “earthy” in 
it, and for this reason it is immortal. Paul plainly shows this 
in I. Cor., i5-45'5o (see Revised Version). Here he shows 
the difference between the first and second Ad'am. The first 
Adam became a “living soul,” that is a man of this world, 
but the last Adam a “life-giving spirit.” “The first man is of 
the earth, earthy.” The second man is “heavenly.” “Flesh 
and blood” (he says) cannot inherit the kingdom of God. 

Some suppose that Christ was translated at time of his 
ascension; but there is nothing in the records to indicate such 
a change at that time. It came when he arose. 

He ate in their presence after his death, not because he 
needed food or used it as we do; but to let them see how real 
and human the life beyond death may be, in which we can 
enjoy all our faculties and perceptions in a way that is spiritual 
and heavenly. 


“Bernard de Cluny. 

14 7 



IX 

THE END OF THE WORLD 

There is nothing so costly as a world. An 
edifice can be built that will last for centuries; but 
its utility and beauty, as well as its enduring 
qualities, will be in proportion to its expense. 

The palaces of Babylon, as well as its celebrated 
Hanging Gardens, which are reckoned among the 
wonders of the past, have fallen into heaps of 
rubbish that are hard to identify, because they 
were made of materials easily procured, and 
handled by thousands of cheap workmen. But the 
splendid columns and colossal figures that stand in 
mute desolation on the banks of the historic Nile 
still remain to tell the story of their remote anti¬ 
quity, and thrill the traveler with sublime emotions 
as he considers their transformation under the 
hand of genius, with the patient labor of years, 

from the red granite quarries of Syene, into forms 
148 


THE END OF THE WORLD 


of beauty and permanence, which time has not 
obliterated. 

The production of a world is costly because the 
plan includes so much, and reaches so far into the 
future. If we knew the history of our planet 
from the hour when its creation was contemplated, 
and had witnessed all the changes through which 
it has passed since it began to be, we should be 
unable to say much about its future, for it is one 
of the things that are eternal. 1 

The design was the result of labor of a kind 
which must have been difficult even for the Supreme 
Being, who works and finds repose after effort. 2 
To originate or evolve ideas connected with the 
construction of a building which would never need 
repair, and would become more interesting and 
valuable with age, would tax the resources of the 
most eminent architect beyond the point of endur¬ 
ance, because he could not conceive of materials 
that would not be susceptible to injury in some 
way, even if they were not affected unfavorably 
by unlimited time. 

x This view may seem to be unscientific or unphilosophical, 
if we judge by the analogies of nature or present indications. 
But such criteria are not always reliable. 

‘Gen. ii. 2-3. 


149 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The plan for the world included an inexhaustible 
supply of everything needed in any age, or in all 
ages, which, nevertheless, must be utilized by its 
inhabitants or it would not be available, thus 
making improvements optional and conditional. 

The evolution of a world implies an expenditure 
of power for long periods of time continuously . 
This process is noticed in the words: “The Spirit 
of God moved upon the face of the waters.” 8 
This means the intense concentration of energy 
upon the surface of the globe in such a way as to 
produce a transformation, by suggestion. The sug¬ 
gestion apears in the words, “Let there be light.” 
The production of the atmosphere was to our 
world the creation of light, for without it all was 
cold and dark. Such was the condition of the 
planet when it was “without form and void, and 
darkness was upon the face of the deep.” 

The generation of the atmosphere must have been 
gradual, for the earth was not without evidences 
of a change that had made it aqueous, showing 
that some heat and light had reached it, but the 
continents and islands were submerged. At the 
divine command the atmosphere was developed to 


3 Gen. i. 2. 
150 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


such an extent that the sun poured in volumes of 
light and heat, making the entire globe, in that 
age, hotter than the torrid zone. Gradually, by 
evaporation, “the waters were lifted from the 
waters” and the dry land appeared. But the forces 
used did not act independently. They were acted 
upon by that force which is superior to all others 
—mind. 4 

Any theory that makes the formation of the 
solar system the result arising from forces and 
material acting incidentally is erroneous. It is not 
necessary to suppose that the earth is a fragment 
of the sun, cooled and solidified. This hypothesis 
has been advanced by some who do not deny 
divine supervision, and it may seem plausible. Let 
us consider it. 

“The earth is a fragment of the sun, cooled 
and solidified. As the sun condensed by cooling, 
it grew heavy, and bulging at the equator, cast off 
fragments which became planets. A drop of oil 
set whirling in a vacuum will flatten at the poles 
and bulge at the equator. Revolved still faster it 
will throw off fragments of itself. These frag¬ 
ments will circle about it. With the sun the 


4 Ch. i.; and Ch. ii., p. 19. 
151 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


fragments cast into the distant ethers with tre¬ 
mendous force, dropped along an orbit formed by 
the centrifugal and centripetal forces. These frag¬ 
ments would naturally fall on a straight line, but 
the pulling of the sun by attraction drew them 
constantly inward, until they described a circle. 
A boy swinging a ball about him held by a string 
is a fair illustration. The ball endeavors to get 
away and fly into space; the string holds it to a 
certain orbit. Attraction of the sun acts on the 
planets as the string does on the ball. This is 
how the earth was made.” 

Our earth is not a fragment of the sun because 
it is a planet, and is essentially different in its con¬ 
stitution and functions. There is as much difference 
between a sun and a planet as there is between a 
tree and a quadruped. The animal might feed on 
the leaves of the tree and thus depend upon it for 
his support, but he could in no wise be identified 
with it, living or dead. This theory would make 
the earth a portion of the sun which had passed into 
a moribund condition. 

If the earth’s temperature were raised until it 
became incandescent, and then increased till it 
reached the limit of cohesion, it would not become 


THE END OF THE WORLD 


a sun, even if it were situated in such a way that 
smaller globes of an earthy kind could revolve 
around it, because it would not have the properties, 
and forces, that are found in the solar rays which 
emanate from a body which has been distinct in 
its nature and purposes from the beginning. The 
sun is not simply planetary matter in a state of 
fusion, although the spectroscope reveals many 
elements in its constitution that are found here, or 
in meteorites. It consists of a combination of 
elements and forces so correlated that it can burn 
and shine with eternal splendor as easily as the 
earth turns over, or rushes on in its never ending 
journey. 

The sun is like an immense electric light, sus¬ 
tained by the power developed from billions of 
Niagaras. Of course it is not simply electrical 
phenomena, because electricity does not have the 
properties of sunshine in its light; but there is a 
fitting analogy, for the sun may be compared to 
a stupendous self-feeding, inexhaustible battery that 
can never fail, because it is supplied by the resources 
of the Universe. 

If we suppose that the planets were thrown off 
from the sun as superfluous matter while it was 


153 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


rotating rapidly, we shall give them violent and 
abnormal generation, as well as untimely birth, 
which is contrary to the order of nature. 

If the sun began to form as a nucleus in a proper 
locality in space, and developed slowly, while the 
planets at appropriate distances began as nuclei in 
places were their movements would not conflict 
with others, and their relation to the sun would 
enable them to feel its influence as the center of 
their life when they reached a period in their for¬ 
mation that would make it essential, and the 
development of this central orb, with its retinue 
of young worlds and satellites, was proportionate 
and symmetrical, we might understand that this 
wonder in the heavens was a growth, generated 
and nourished under the controlling influences of 
Deity in a way that was natural . 5 

The power of mind over matter is beginning to 
be understood, for we have it in limited degrees. 
Certain diseases can be cured by mental sugges¬ 
tion in cases which do not yield to powerful material 
remedies, and in which there are disorders in the 
flesh, as well as in the mind. There is also evidence 
showing that some persons can operate upon and 


6 Ch. i., p. 5. 

154 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


move, heavy bodies by the use of a force which 
they call human “magnetism.” 6 This is mys¬ 
terious but it is not miraculous. It is certain that 
we possess by nature, in a limited degree, some of 
the characteristics of Deity, for we were created 
“in His likeness.” 

The stability of a world is in proportion to its 
cost, which cannot be computed by mortals, for it 
is the result of effort, extending through periods 
of time that are incomprehensible to us. It is a 
sphere about which there is no strain or friction, 
though its motions are rapid and incessant. Its 
track is unobstructed. Planets do not collide. The 
wisdom that has given them their courses is 
unerring. 

Physical changes that involve calamity, such as 
the destruction of life and property by seismic 
phenomena, or storm and flood, and drought, may 
be expected in the future. History shows that 
these things have come in all ages. But this does 
not prove that they will be as extensive and appall¬ 
ing as they have been. It may be hard for us to 
see why natural evils should exist; but we have 
clearer light when we see that nature is a develop- 


8 See Ch. xii. 
155 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


ment, and much more time must be allowed before 
the best results can be secured. 7 Disturbance below 
the surface of the earth is not so frequent or dis¬ 
astrous as in former times, because the entire globe 
is approaching a condition more satisfactory and 
approximately normal. 

We are more capable of counteracting and avoid¬ 
ing calamities as we become more intelligent. 

Drought can be avoided by new methods of 
irrigation. There is much water in the mountains 
that can be led to distant parts. Artesian wells 
are possible in vast deserts which can be changed 
into fertile and blooming gardens. Floods can be 
avoided by directing superfluous waters into chan¬ 
nels provided for them, and men will see that it is 
not best to settle and build populous towns on low 
and dangerous ground. They will grow forests 
that will check the reckless course of tornadoes, and 
shade the sources of rivers that they may not 
become diminutive in volume. They will not be 
afraid of the Ocean when great storms occur, 
because they can use ships so large and strong that 
the sea will lose its terrors. 

There is nothing in nature that should lead us 


7 Ch. x. 
156 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


to believe that sometime in the future the earth is 
to be overwhelmed by a universal and destructive 
conflagration that will involve the ruin of the sun, 
and other planets. Just what would become of the 
exhausted sun, and frozen or incinerated earth, is 
not made very clear by those who advocate this 
view of the world’s future. Possibly the globe’s 
desolate corpse might be resuscitated, or in some 
way renewed. The sun, it is thought, will not be 
needed. The poet, Addison, has given us a vivid 
conception of what many believe will certainly 
occur. 

“The soul secured in her existence smiles 
At the drawn dagger and defies its point. 

The stars shall fade away, the sun himself 
Grow dim with age, and nature sink in years; 

But thou shalt flourish in immortal youth, 

Unhurt amidst the war of elements, 

The wreck of matter, and the crush of worlds.” 

After this an era will begin, it is thought, in 
which a new heaven and a new earth will appear, 
built upon the purified foundations of the old, or 
substituted for them. It would be easier for us to 
accept this theory if we could believe that the 
Universe was created in six days, of time as we 
now measure it. But the testimony of the rocks 
'$7 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


concerning the antiquity of the globe cannot be 
successfully denied. 8 

When a literal interpretation is given to inspired 
predictions which refer to the remote future, or the 
prehistoric past, great mistakes may be made 
which lead into divergent opinions, confusion and 
inexplicable mystery. The obscurity of prophetic 
language is not easily penetrated unless there is 
ability and willingness to accept authentic contem¬ 
porary history, especially when predictions are asso¬ 
ciated with positive and definite statements con¬ 
cerning the time within which fulfillment will occur. 

A prediction concerning the “end of the world, 
which included the coming of Christ in the clouds 
of heaven, with power and great glory, is recorded 
in the twenty-fourth chapter of Matthew. This 
was to be preceded by the preaching of the gospel 
“in all the world, for a witness unto all nations; 


8 Some scientists think that our solar system will in time 
be changed into the primeval matter from which it was 
evolved, and new worlds developed from it. And that this 
process can be observed in certain parts of the Universe. 
This theory may have been built upon the analogies of nature, 
together with a misunderstanding concerning certain biblical 
predictions in which the “world” or the “earth” is by meton- 
omy put for character and works, and fire is used as the 
symbol of judgment. I. Cor. iii. 12-15. 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


and ‘then shall the end come.’ ” This is associated 
with the failure of the sun and moon, and the fall 
of the stars, and the shaking of the heavens. At 
that time the angels would come, and there would be 
a “great sound of a trumpet,” and the elect would 
be “gathered from one end of heaven to the other.” 

Then comes the plain statement which will not 
bear anything but a literal meaning: “Verily I say 
unto you, this generation shall not pass till all these 
things be fulfilled.” This prophecy is also recorded 
by the Evangelists, Luke and Mark, with a specific 
reference to the time within which all would be 
fulfilled. Substantially the same things are noticed 
in the Writings of Paul, and in the Revelation of 
St. John, but with this difference: They looked 
for the fulfillment of these predictions very soon . 
They confidently expected that these startling events 
and great changes would come before they died. 
Paul certainly referred to himself and his friends 
when he said: 

“Then we which are alive and remain shall be 
caught up together with them in the clouds to meet 
the Lord in the air, and so shall we ever be with 
the Lord.” 9 And Peter, speaking of the dissolu- 


9 1 . Thess. iv. 17. 
159 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


tion of the earth, and its consumption by fire, 
writes to the church in his day: “Wherefore, 
beloved, seeing that ye look for such things, be dili¬ 
gent that ye may be found of him in peace, without 
spot, and blameless.” 10 John, in his message to 
the seven churches in Asia, speaks of his vision 
definitely when he says that it has reference to 
things “Which must shortly come to pass.” He 
emphasizes this statement in his prologue with 
these words: “for the time is at hand” In the 
closing words of the last chapter we find this 
important fact repeated in the words of the 
Redeemer: “Surely, I come quickly.” 11 

If the calculations of the inspired men, who were 
so confident of a speedy fulfillment of these proph¬ 
ecies in their times, were so wide of the mark that 
a delay of about nineteen centuries has occurred, 
and we are still looking for the end of the world 
which they predicted, can we accept other things 
that they have written concerning us and our times, 
and feel that they are reliable? 

To conclude that there was in these predictions 
a “blending and foreshadowing” of events that did 
occur in those times with a final consummation in 

11 Rev. i. 1-3. Rev. xxii. 20. 
l6o 


10 II. Peter iii. 14. 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


the indefinite future, is to impeach statements con¬ 
cerning the time that are absolutely inclusive of 
the most vivid representations of the judgment, the 
resurrection, and that which is associated with the 
end for which many are looking now. 

It is certain that they were not right in their 
expectations concerning the nearness of these events, 
or some have not wisely interpreted their messages. 
A better understanding may be obtained as we 
consider the relation of these vivid descriptions 
to great revolutions, bloody tragedies, and nat¬ 
ural calamities, affecting the whole known world 
in the last half of the first century of the Christian 
era. 

The world of those days, as they knew it, was 
not the globe. No one could show that the earth 
was a ball; and no one had any definite ideas con¬ 
cerning its extent. This fact should be noticed as 
we read the Bible, and other ancient writings. It 
was indeed a very limited territory when compared 
with what we now find it to be. And it would 
be difficult to show that the most intelligent per¬ 
sons, not excepting those who wrote under divine 
inspiration and penetrated the remote future with 
prophetic vision, had a conception of the great 
ifa 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


round world, that would compare favorably with 
that of a child in this enlightened age. 

When, therefore, we are considering events that 
affected the world, or would have a disturbing 
influence upon it in the near future, we should 
understand that it was a small world in comparison 
with ours, though densely populated, and having 
great centers that represented it. Among these 
great representative cities were Rome, Jerusalem, 
and Babylon. Of course there were other very 
important places, such as Ephesus, Athens, Corinth, 
Antioch, Alexandria, and Selucia. 

Babylon, in the first century, was still a great 
city, though it had suffered much through natural 
decay, devastation by invading armies, and neglect. 
Materials had been taken from it to build other 
cities. Still it retained much of its former prestige. 
It was a commercial metropolis of the East, and 
contained a flourishing Christian church, mentioned 
by St. Peter. 12 Here many Jews resided—the 
descendants of those who had been carried into 
captivity centuries before, and did not return to 
their native land. 

Babylon was a city that had fallen many times, 


12 1 . Peter v. 13. 
162 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


but had risen again and again, like the fabled 
Phoenix, from the ashes of its fires. Against it 
the prophets uttered their maledictions, for it repre¬ 
sented the corruption of the East and the historic 
past. 

The Apocalypse was written and sent to the 
seven churches in proconsular Asia before the 
destruction of Jerusalem by the Roman army under 
Titus; for there is a prediction concerning this city 
and its fall in the eleventh chapter of this book, 
where it is noticed as: “The great city, which spir¬ 
itually is called Sodom and Egypt. Where, also, 
our Lord was crucified” 13 This city had been 
warned years before, but the time for its total 
destruction was very near. The seven churches 
were prepared to notice this awful catastrophe, and 
study its significance with copies of the Apocalypse 
before them. Their relation to Jerusalem and its 
history was such that they, and the places they 
represented, would take a deep interest in a siege 
and capitulation more tragical than the world has 
even known before or since. 

Corruption in Rome—the world’s capital—had 

18 There is a wide difference of opinion concerning the 
time when John wrote the Apocalypse. 

163 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 

become so rank and nauseating that its abomina¬ 
tions could no longer be tolerated by thoughtful 
and discriminating people. It was a center of vice 
and moral rottenness without parallel in any age. 
For this reason its Emperors were sometimes called 
“beasts” in the imagery of the Apocalypse, and the 
city “the bottomless pit,” or “the abyss.” This term 
may also denote a source of corrupt power in the 
East. 14 

The Revelation of St. John is more obscure and 
unintelligible than other prophecies, but there is a 
reason for it. His life could not have been pre¬ 
served, and his inspired thoughts delivered and 
circulated in the great centers of population if he 
had not disguised his ideas, clothing them in 
metaphor and symbolism, rich and varied, confusing 
and mysterious to the average reader, but very 
attractive. If he had given the names of places 
and described prominent characters in such a way 
that they could have been identified without doubt, 
he would have been arrested and imprisoned, and 
search made for copies of his book that they might 
be destroyed. 

He does not state that his residence in the Isle 


14 Rev. ix. i. 
164 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


of Patmos was compulsory . 15 He was there, he 
says: “for the word of God, and the testimony of 
Jesus Christ.” This secluded island in the Aegean 
Sea afforded him a quiet retreat for study and 
profound reflection on the momentous events which 
were soon to startle the world. 

These things were revealed to him in visions 
which involved scenic-parables, so intensely real¬ 
istic and rapturous that he actually became, for 
the time, a deni'zen of two worlds, the spiritual 
and the natural. He defines this peculiar state as 
a sudden change , divinely wrought in these words: 
“And immediately I was in the Spirit. 16 

The possibility of entering into a condition so 
exalted and exclusive of earthly enthrallment, is 
profusely illustrated in the experience of this 
eminent man whose uncommon spirituality and 
natural aptitudes opened the way for this remark- 
j able transformation. Nevertheless he did not enter 
into these great privileges until he had been thor¬ 
oughly tested for years, under trials from which 
most men would shrink with alarm, or fail in 
crucial moments. He combined heroic courage 

1S Tradition makes St. John a prisoner or exile, while living 
in Patmos; but this has not been verified. 

"Rev. iv. 2. 

165 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


with gentleness and absolute devotion; and withal 
a susceptibility to impressions from the other 
world, which was coupled with such rare discrim¬ 
ination that he could not be deceived while listening, 
for divine thoughts by simulations or interpolations 
from unworthy sources. And, so, his revelations 
are reliable and bear the insignia of divine approval. 

In the study of valuable literature which appears 
to be the result of supernatural co-operation, the 
conditions under which it was produced should not 
be overlooked; for who can show that such priv¬ 
ileges may not be given to others when the times 
require them, and persons can be found who are 
qualified for such work? There is another reason 
for the careful consideration of psychological and 
physical phenomena that are evidently miraculous. 
They are associated with what is called the “End 
of the World.” 17 

The end of the zvorld was the end of an age or 
period, which included a generation. This is clearly 
stated and implied in the Scriptures. The end of 
the world was the end of a period of time wdthin 
which a generation lived and were in some instances 
still living, as: “This generation shall not pass till 


Matt. xxiv. 3. 
166 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


all things shall be fulfilled.” 18 It may be compared 
to seed-time and harvest. 19 The time of ingather¬ 
ing may come earlier in certain seasons, because the 
conditions are favorable. It is the end of a succes¬ 
sion of years, comprehended within certain limits 
recognized by historians as the opening and closing 
of a distinct age, different in many respects from 
the preceding and succeeding era. Every century 
brings great changes and ushers us into a new 
world. 

The end of the world may be understood as the 
consummation of a period which can be measured 
approximately by the years of the oldest person of 
his century. If he could rise and live again in 
mortal form he would find himself in what he would 
call a new world, and he would feel that he was 
alone in that world, and would have to adapt him¬ 
self to its new ways, or be regarded as a man of 
the past. The people of the last age are unknown 
to us. We have heard of them, but they are 
strangers. 

The people of the next age we can never know 
unless we meet them in the spiritual states; and 
then we should find that their interests were closely 


“Matt. xxiv. 34. 


167 


“Matt. xiii. 39. 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


identified with the age in which they lived in the 
physical world. And while anxious to know some¬ 
thing about the past they could not be classified 
with us, and must be always more deeply interested 
in the people of their own times than in those of 
other ages, because of the associations, relations, 
and surroundings of the past, which will consti¬ 
tute an important part of their lives 

It is evident that what constitutes an age is 
really a world of its kind. And the last man of 
his world could be found and actually identified 
if we knew the years of all his contemporaries. 
If, then, the end of the world was the end of an 
age, it has come in the past, and will come again. 

It remains for ns to notice that which is asso¬ 
ciated with the end as it has been predicted in the 
Bible, such as the resurrection, the judgment, the 
coming of Christ, the promotion of the righteous 
and the degradation of the wicked, as well as such 
physical changes as the apparent decline and failure 
of nature, including great natural calamities such 
as earthquakes, darkness, falling stars, pestilence, 
famine, signs and wonders in the heavens, and, 
above all, the dissolving of the heavens and earth 
by fire, and the shaking of what seems to be the 
168 


THE END OF THE WORLD 


whole fabric of nature, ending in final collapse, in 
which the heaven and the earth flee away, and 
there is no place for them. 

It may seem presumptuous and positively rash 
and foolish for us to suppose that such things have 
occurred . We might admit that many great and 
direful events can be noticed in the past which 
would sanction the use of very strong language 
and vivid imagery, as they were anticipated in 
prophecy. But the coming of Christ in the clouds, 
a general resurrection, and such a tremendous 
change as the appearance of new heavens and earth 
would be more than we could accept, or even regard 
as a possibility of the past unless we could see how 
such things have happened. 

When, however, we realize that these things 
were expected very soon by those who mentioned 
them, and that there was nothing equivocal in their 
utterances concerning fulfillment in the near future, 
we may be led to a more careful scrutiny of the 
subject and find they were not mistaken. 

In prophetic writings “the heavens and the 
earth” often represent the existing condition of 
affairs in the world; and a commotion in them 
means a great revolution. 

169 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The coming of the Son of Man “with clouds” 
indicates a conspicuous revelation of His presence, 
and does not necessarily involve His appearance 
in the sky, among clouds, in a literal sense, for he 
could then be seen by only a few people in the 
locality where he appeared, if he were viewed by 
living persons in the natural state. This imagery 
is used in the Psalms where it is said of the Lord 
“Who maketh the clouds his chariot: who walketh 
upon the wings of the wind.” 20 In the song of 
Deborah, the prophetess, composed after a great 
victory, we have these words: “The earth trembled 
and the heavens dropped 21 In the forty-sixth 
psalm there is a grateful reference of the success 
of the past in war, under divine direction. “The 
heathen raged, the kingdoms were moved, he 
uttered his voice, the earth melted ” 

A very explicit and remarkable prediction con¬ 
cerning the fall of Babylon, and its complete 
destruction is found in the thirteenth chapter of 
Isaiah, in which he says that “the stars of heaven, 
and the constellations thereof, shall not give their 
light, the sun shall be darkened in his going forth, 
and the moon shall not cause her light to shine” 


M Ps. civ. 3. 


170 


21 Judges v. 4. 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


He goes farther and says that the heavens shall 
be shaken, and the earth moved out of its place ” 
All this has actually occurred, but no one believes 
that, in a literal sense, or as a matter of fact, the 
sun, moon, and stars failed, the earth was thrown 
out of its orbit, and the Universe, or solar system, 
shaken when Babylon fell. 

There is a reference in the first chapter of 
Hebrews to the fall of empires, and the decay of 
nations and the permanence of Christ’s Kingdom, 
in which the heavens and earth are metaphorically 
used for principalities and powers. “They shall 
perish; but thou remainest, and they shall wax old 
as doth a garment, and as a vesture shall thou 
fold them up, and they shall be changed.” 22 It 
is probable that Thomas Campbell has given this 
passage a natural interpretation and made it the 
basis of his poem called “The Last Man.” He 
gives us a doleful conception of the environment, 
taking us far into the misty and uncertain future 
which has a sombre coloring. 

'The sun’s eye had a sickly glare. 

The earth with age was wan. 

The skeletons of nations were 
Around that lonely man.” 


22 Heb. i. 10-12. 

171 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


Our earth shows no symptoms of infirmity. It 
is still youthful, and there is no prospect of decline 
when maturity is reached, for it is a progressive 
creation, perennial in its nature, having a tendency 
to improve in every respect with advancing age. 
It is an emblem of immortality. 

Those who predict the death of the solar system 
by heart failure, and would show us that the sun 
is shrinking by condensation and thus gradually 
losing its ability to warm and illuminate the earth, 
and that its inhabitants will feel the difference in 
a few millions of years, should not overlook the 
fact that climatic changes have occurred in the 
distant past and may come again through read¬ 
justment of the earth’s position in its orbit, or 
an increase or diminution of the sun’s energy; but 
they have always been for the better. And there 
is no valid reason for supposing that they will in 
the future be for the worse. 

Earthquakes, volcanic phenomena, floods, great 
fires, invasions by vast hordes of barbarians, 
plagues and famines were predicted by St. John 
in the Apocalypse, and a careful study of the his¬ 
tory of his times will show that his judgment 
concerning the time for fulfillment was right. 


172 


THE END OF THE WORLD 


Several great earthquakes, some of which were 
associated with the most awful volcanic disturb¬ 
ances, are noticed by historians. And there is 
nothing more terrific and appalling, especially when 
they occur near the sea. The northern shores of 
the Mediterranean, as well as the islands of that 
sea, have been noted for calamities of this kind 
for thousands of years. Here are the volcanoes 
Aetna, Vesuvius, and Stromboli. This region has 
been frequently visited by sudden and awful devas¬ 
tation covering many square miles of the most 
populous and fertile territory. The sea, at times, 
rolling in upon the land and then receding as 
thousands perished. 

The great eruption of Vesuvius, which began 
August 23. A.D. 79, was foreshadowed by John 
in the eighth chapter of Revelation. He speaks of 
“hail and fire mingled with blood.” Showers of 
hot stones, cinders, and ashes, falling on unpro¬ 
tected heads in city and country, made the earth 
bloody with human victims. “A great mountain 
burning with fire was cast into the sea.” The 
southern half of Vesuvius disappeared in the sea 
during this eruption, “And the third part of the 
sea became blood. And the third part of the 
173 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


creatures which were in the sea and had life, died, 
and the third part of the ships were destroyed.” 

There was a great commotion in the sea at that 
time. The elder Pliny, in charge of a fleet, found 
shoals in new places, and was obliged to seek 
anchorage in another harbor. After landing he 
protected his head with pillows, but was soon 
asphyxiated by noxious gases. The ashes and 
stones destroyed many vessels, and poisoned ani¬ 
mal life in the water. Rivers, wells, and sources 
of water supply for cities were spoiled, “made 
bitter.” 

“The third part of the sun was smitten, and the 
third part of the moon, and the third part of the 
stars; so as the third part of them was darkened.” 
So this calamity appeared to St. John in his vision 
years before it happened. The darkness continued 
for several days, and was very extensive and full 
of inconceivable horrors. It spread over the whole 
surrounding country, hiding the sun, moon, and 
stars, and covering, approximately, a third of the 
territory to which John refers, the falling vol¬ 
canic matter destroying vegetation and animals and 
thousands of persons. The city of Pompeii was 
buried under sixteen feet of fine pumice stone, and 
i74 


THE END OF THE WORLD 


Herculaneum under sixty feet of liquid mud, which 
solidified. 

The seven churches in Asia were prepared to 
notice this overwhelming disaster. They were not 
near enough to be injured by it, but carefully pre¬ 
served copies of the Apocalypse, for they saw the 
value of such prophecy. Hence we have it to-day. 

The end of the age in which the Revelation 
was written was full of momentous events, which 
some have tried to connect with the end of our 
age or world. 

The East was in a state of ferment. Rome had 
discouraging wars with the Parthians, who had 
become very powerful in this great empire, which 
included much of the country, formerly held by 
Alexander the Great, including Babylon and other 
cities on the Euphrates. This great region was 
governed by one of Alexander’s generals and his 
successors for many years; but in John’s time the 
Parthians claimed much of it. 

These fierce people are described and their 
peculiar methods of warfare represented in very 
striking and vivid imagery in the ninth chapter of 
Revelation. They were expert horsemen, and were 
at home in the deserts to which they generally 
175 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


decoyed the enemy. Their heavy metallic arrows 
inflicted terrible wounds, for they were barbed and 
poisoned and could not be easily extracted. “And 
in those days shall men seek death, and shall not 
find it.” 23 They were more effective in retreat 
than in attack, and while galloping at full speed 
would shoot backward with fatal certainty. The 
nomadic Parthians of the interior let their hair 
grow long, and made themselves hideous in battle 
charges by making strange sounds on instruments, 
and yelling like madmen. They were clad in very 
strong armor of iron and leather hard to penetrate: 
“And they had hair as the hair of women, and 
their teeth were as the teeth of lions. And they 
had breast-plates, as it were breast-plates of iron, 
and the sound of their wings was as the sound of 
chariots of many horses running to battle.” 24 
Their method of striking backward while retreat¬ 
ing at full speed on horseback was seen in the 
vision and comprehended by St. John, who believed 
that the meaning would be understood by those 
for whom the vision was given; he calls them 
“scorpions.” “And they had tails like unto scor¬ 
pions, and there were stings in their tails.” 25 


Rev. ix. 6. 


Rev. ix. 9. 
176 


Rev, ix, io. 




THE END OF THE WORLD 

The Parthians themselves were sometimes invaded 
by savage hordes from the north, in overwhelming 
numbers, tempted by the riches of the cities of 
the alluvial plain where Babylon and Selucia 
flourished. 

A carefully devised scheme for plunder is pre¬ 
dicted. Taking advantage of the high and dan¬ 
gerous water in the river, they began by seizing 
the flood gates and opening the sluices, thus 
deluging the country and creating a panic. In the 
confusion they rushed in upon the unprotected 
inhabitants, creating consternation with fire and 
swwd, carrying off much of the accuhiulated 
w r ealth of centuries into the region beyond the 
mountains of Armenia. This preconcerted raid by 
myriads of incarnate devils is thus indicated by 
the Seer of Patmos: “I heard a voice saying, Loose 
the four angels that are bound in the great river 
Euphrates. And the four angels were loosed which 
were prepared for an hour, and a day, and a month, 
and a year, for to slay the third part of men.” ** 

About this time secret preparations were made 
by the Romans for the siege of Jerusalem. Mean¬ 
while this city was disturbed by bloody factions 

M Rev. ix. 14. 

1 77 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


within, and prophets were witnessing against its 
wickedness, and announcing the end. 27 

Stars falling from heaven represent persons good 
or bad in the spiritual or natural world who occupy, 
or have occupied, places of power or authority. 
A collapse in the kingdom of darkness which was 
extensive is noticed in Rev. vi. 13: “And the stars 
of heaven fell unto the earth, even as a fig-tree 
casteth her untimely figs, when she is shaken of 
a mighty wind.” The thought has its parallel in 
Christ’s vision of Satan falling “as lightning from 
heaven.” 

When in vision angels sound their trumpets and 
proclaim woes, or pour out vials of wrath upon 
the earth, it does not necessarily follow that the 
source of these troubles is heavenly, or that they 
are divine inflictions. They simply announce im¬ 
pending calamities and their consequences, here 
and hereafter. 

The resurrection of the dead has been indefinitely 
postponed by those who have not understood that 
it has occurred at certain periods in the past, in 
a general as well as a special sense. A great and 
general resurrection of the dead is now before us. 

27 Rev. xi. 

178 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


Special resurrections may also occur at different 
times, and the end of our world is approaching. 
The coming of Christ should also be expected. 

All this we can believe without attempting to 
deny that myriads have already risen, and now 
rejoice in full glorification, as well as full form , 
having real but spiritual bodies. 

If the angels were originally corporeal (and 
there is nothing in the Scriptures to show that 
they were not, and much to convince us that they 
were, for those who have appeared were known 
as men from the spiritual world), then heaven, as 
well as hell, is thronged with incorporeal beings 
who have risen from the dead. If in doubt con¬ 
cerning the human origin of angels, then let us 
consider the great multitude which John saw, 
which no man could number, of all nations, and 
kindred and people and tongues, who stood before 
the throne and before the lamb, clothed with white 
robes, and palms in their hands. Special attention 
is suggested by one of the angels concerning their 
former life and present glorification. The fact 
that they had been redeemed and exalted in the 
heavenly state is emphasized. 28 

25 Rev. vii. 13 - 14 - 

See reference to illustration: “Shipwreck,” p. 189. 

179 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The resurrection produced such a remarkable 
transformation in one of the angels that he seemed 
almost divine, and John was disposed to pay him 
divine honors until he found that this angel was a 
man who had risen from the dead. John says: 
“I fell down to worship at the feet of the angel 
which showed me these things. Then saith he 
unto me, See thou do it not; for I am thy fellow 
servant, and of thy brethren the prophets.” 29 
It is evident that language which seems to locate 
dead but living human beings in the earth as a 
temporary place of abode, where they repose in 
hope for an indefinite time, will not bear literal 
construction, otherwise our graveyards would be 
among the most vital spots on the planet. And 
a grave-digger would be in doubt as he thrust his 
spade into an ancient cemetery, feeling that he 
might disturb a dead but living person. And, yet, 
some people have impressions about this matter that 
are hard to remove. They do not really believe 
that their friends are in the ground; but that the 
mortal remains are there. 

When Daniel refers to the awakening of “many 
that sleep in the dust of the earth” he means persons, 

M Rev. xxii. 8-9. 

180 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


not decayed remains. When reference is made to 
people coming “forth from their graves” or from 
the “dust,” or the “sea,” the language is metaphor¬ 
ical, and a spiritual resurrection is implied; unless 
as in the case of Lazarus, a natural one is under¬ 
stood. And in either case, by metonymy, bodies 
represent persons. 

When Samuel appeared to Saul, the language 
used in the record seems to show that he was 
brought up out of the earth: “Then said the woman 
whom shall I bring up unto thee? And he said. 
Bring me up Samuel.” The woman was fright¬ 
ened, not expecting a real appearance, and said: 
“An old man cometh up.” And Samuel said to 
Saul: “Why hast thou disquieted me to bring me 
up? And yet, Samuel did not come up from the 
grave, for his corpse was buried in Ramah, many 
miles away, and he appeared in Endor, not in a 
natural, but in a spiritual body. 30 

Possibly the reason for believing that great and 
general resurrections have not occurred at different 
periods arises from a misunderstanding concerning 
their visibility, or perceptibility in the natural world. 
Nowhere in the Scripture do we find that spiritual 


30 1 . Sam. xxviii. 
181 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


resurrections, general or special, have been visible 
to mortal eyes. What has been seen in visions by 
those who were capable of looking into the spir¬ 
itual states must be excepted. Nor do we find that 
the judgment, general or special, the resurrection, 
the coming of Christ, and those things that are 
vividly represented in prophetic views of the last 
day, or day of judgment, will be visible or per¬ 
ceptible to people in the flesh unless they have been 
“changed” so that both spiritual and natural 
worlds are open to them. 31 

There were a few people in apostolic times who 
had this privilege, because they sought it, and were 
able to take it. Others since, whose spiritual per¬ 
ceptions were remarkable, have known and felt 
much that they could not disclose, because it was 
not expedient, for their testimony would be mis¬ 
understood, or seem incredible. 

St. Paul was open to both worlds, and was 
capable of making himself understood in that age, 
and leading others into like privileges. He speaks 
modestly of himself, but rejoices in his visions and 

81 This privilege was given to St. John according to the 
Saviour’s prediction. John xxi. 20-23. John saw the Com¬ 
ing of Christ and the Judgment of that age, while in the nat¬ 
ural body, being open to both worlds. 

182 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


revelations which were sometimes associated with 
transformations, difficult even for him to under¬ 
stand : “It is not expedient for me, doubtless, to 
glory. I will come to visions and revelations of 
the Lord. I knew a man in Christ, above fourteen 
years ago (whether in the body I cannot tell, or 
whether out of the body I cannot tell), such 
a one caught up to the third heaven. . . . How 
that he was caught up into paradise and heard 
unspeakable words, which it is not lawful for a 
man to utter.” 32 

He was so well understood by the Church at 
Thessalonica, which was intensely spiritual and in 
full sympathy with him, that he was able to pre¬ 
dict, for them with him, a realization of the coming 
of Christ in his age, and a great resurrection of 
believers. This they would be able to perceive 
while yet alive. It would involve vision, revela¬ 
tion, and “change”; but not, in this case, death or 
translation by the putting on of immortality. It 
would be unspeakably rapturous. He says: “For 
this we say unto you by the word of the Lord, 
that we that are alive that are left unto the coming 
of the Lord shall in no wise precede them that are 


82 II. Cor. Xii. 

183 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


fallen asleep. For the Lord himself shall descend 
from heaven with a shout, with the voice of the 
archangel, and with the trump of God, and the 
dead in Christ shall rise first; then we that are 
alive that are left shall together with them be 
caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the 
air, and so shall we ever be with the Lord. 
Wherefore comfort one another with these 
words.” 33 It is evident that they would not 
remain in the air always, nor would their dead 
and risen friends; but they would, in a spiritual 
sense be “caught up” together with them, and enjoy 
heavenly felicity as they witnessed their promotion, 
as Paul was “caught up” to the third heaven, and 
could not tell whether he was in the natural body 
or out of it. Thus they would have an understand¬ 
ing of things in the other world, and be able to 
illuminate others. 

So John was carried away “in the spirit to a great 
and high mountain, and saw that great city, the 
Holy Jerusalem, descending out of heaven from 
God.” 34 Still he lived in the natural body; but 
heaven was accessible at such times. 

The binding of Satan for a thousand years, and 


** I. Thess. iv. 15-18. R. V. 

184 


Rev. xxi. 10. 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


his confinement for that time in the bottomless pit, 
and subsequent release for a season, the first resur¬ 
rection, and the second death. The work of the 
enemy upon the nations inciting and prompting 
them in their persecution of the saints, as well as 
his final and complete limitation and degradation 
in the lake of fire, were seen by John in his vision 
of things that would and did occur in the spiritual 
world, and should not be classified with those 
things which would happen in the natural world, 
and soon be observed by mortal eyes. 35 

The great white throne and Him that sat on it, 
the appearance of the dead, small and great, the 
opening of the books, the judgment, the appear¬ 
ance of those who had perished in the sea, or had 
been reserved in the spiritual states for examination, 
are figurative representations of what occurred in 
the other world, and will occur again, varying with 
the circumstances and conditions of the times, for 
our characters will be tested, and our lives reviewed 
and examined, and our destiny determined. 

The new heavens and earth will appear and will 
correspond with the glowing descriptions of St. 
John as in vision he saw them and recorded his 


“Rev. xx. 

185 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


impressions concerning them in the last two chap¬ 
ters of the Apocalypse; but they are spiritual and 
very difficult for us to understand now. Never¬ 
theless their value and permanence are profusely 
illustrated. 36 

In this new and blessed state which is called the 
“Holy Jerusalem” or “a better country that is a 
heavenly” there will be “no more sea,” inasmuch 
as all parts of the natural world will be, and are 
now, accessible to the inhabitants of heaven, with¬ 
out loss of time or danger. They will not need 
the light of the sun, for terrestrial darkness cannot 
interfere with vision when spiritual perception is 
perfected. To them it is, and to the living who 
are worthy, it will be, a “heavens and earth wherein 
dwelleth righteousness”; because all that is evil is 
excluded. 

But the physical world will continue to be the 
never-failing source of supply for the celestial, 
which will constantly receive new people as the gen • 
erations come and go. 37 

Therefore, heaven can never grow old. It is 
emphatically a “new” realm, and is represented as 
such in divine revelation. Its inhabitants are very 

30 Rev. xxi. 31 Ch. i., p. 3 and 15. 

186 



THE END OF THE WORLD 


progressive, and do not decline with age. All is 
fresh and bright and interesting. The oldest people 
are very mature in wisdom, but they are adolescent 
in their tastes, sympathies, and emotions. They 
combine the rich and attractive characteristics of 
maturity with the exuberance of perpetual youth. 

The administration of the divine government is 
not without great advantages in the spiritual world; 
for there is among all classes, including the worst 
and most ignorant, ability to understand easily and 
quickly that which is bewildering and unintelligible 
here, because the veil is drawn aside and immor¬ 
tality demonstrated. And as everything is open 
the adjustment of difficulties, and settlement of af¬ 
fairs, is accomplished with celerity and promptness. 

Here we often wait for a better understanding; 
there it comes quickly. Here we look for light; 
but are troubled with mysteries concerning our¬ 
selves and the life beyond. Here we arrange for 
a limited time and see that the end will come soon; 
there we may suddenly notice that the end of life 
and the end of our world is passed. And still we 
live and cannot die, and the vast, the unbounded 
future, like a shoreless ocean transcends imagina¬ 
tion, stretching on into infinity. 

187 


HELL AND MERCY 


The origin of natural evils has perplexed phi¬ 
losophers and moralists for thousands of years. 
As we study nature we are delighted with revela¬ 
tions of wisdom and goodness; but we are obliged 
to admit that some things are distressing and 
objectionable to every one, and seem to be inflic¬ 
tions, or necessary troubles. 

Agriculture is the foundation of our resources; 
for without the products of the soil the world 
would soon starve, but the results of labor in the 
field are uncertain. Much depends upon the season. 
And then insect pests, destructive animals, tornadoes 
and floods may interfere with success. It is hard 
for the farmer to see why noxious weeds are so 
abundant, and persistent in their growth, and why 
diseases should cut off his flocks and herds. 

If we could pass out of the present life without 
188 



Why Should Storms be so Destructive?” —Page 179. 



























HELL AND MERCY 


disease that involved suffering and painful decline, 
and understand that such was the infallible pro¬ 
vision of nature, we should dwell upon the fact 
with satisfaction. If children could be born with¬ 
out agony and danger for mothers, the world would 
rejoice. 

Parents may be responsible in some instances for 
deformity and imbecility in their offspring, but 
frequently they are not, and a tender, thoughtful 
mother looks upon her babe born blind, or hope¬ 
lessly disfigured with a mark, which is a cause of 
wonder and sorrow. 

Why should storms be so destructive? Electric¬ 
ity is a valuable agent, but lightning is an unfortu¬ 
nate phenomenon, because we cannot tell just where 
it may strike. 

Poison has its uses, but it is a source of misery, 
pain, and horror, not only in nature where it is a 
constant menace in the vast tropical regions of the 
earth, but in the hands of multitudes who use it 
unwisely and wickedly. If it could be excluded, 
or something substituted for it, humanity would 
suffer less. 

The prevalence of certain obnoxious and deadly 
diseases, such as leprosy, yellow fever, and tuber- 
189 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


culosis, may be counteracted or checked by sanitary 
measures. But whence came such terrible afflic¬ 
tions ? Why should they have threatened and 
cursed humanity so long ? And to what extent are 
people responsible for them ? It is easy to moralize 
on this subject by calling attention to the “uses of 
adversity” and the “beneficence of pain” as a 
“danger signal,” and a “means of discipline”; but 
the “blessedness” of calamities that cannot be 
avoided is not apparent to most people, and there 
are very few, if any, who know how to be grateful 
for them. 

There are those who think that everything in 
nature that is not agreeable, or is clearly seen to 
be evil, should be attributed to the failure of Adam 
in the primeval paradise; for they understand that 
his transgression and consequent disgrace and 
degradation, had an unfavorable effect upon all 
nature, which was noticed at that time, and has 
never been corrected since. Although they will 
admit that much light has come to us through new 
revelations and great privileges in the fulfillment 
of promises. 

This belief seems to have arisen from the idea 
that the entire globe was cursed when Adam fell, 


190 


HELL AND MERCY 


and natural evils will not be removed until a ter¬ 
restrial millennium dawns upon us; but they have 
gone too far in their conclusions, for there is no 
reference in the biblical account to the introduction 
of natural evils which had not previously existed. 1 

Adam had difficulty in his occupation because 
he was demoralized by his apostasy, and was, 
therefore, incapable of conducting his affairs so as 
to achieve success. His poverty was the result of 
incapacity and neglect. It is absurd to suppose 
that Almighty God “cursed” the earth for his sake. 
The language involves a prediction and a warning 
against slothfulness which was not heeded. 2 

Eve was disappointed in her children. Abel was 
killed, and Cain became a refugee in a distant 
country. Not until Seth was born was a man 
found who could be placed on the genealogical list 
of this new line of which so much was expected. 3 
Therefore, her sorrow was multiplied as well as 
her conception, but it does not follow that all 
women are liable to such misfortunes because she 
sinned. 

Physical death is not an evil. It is a method of 
exit from the corporeal state which is necessary, 

2 Gen. iii. 17-18. 

191 


1 Gen. iii. 


3 Ch. vi., p. 80. 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


for without it natural evils of many kinds would 
become so numerous and distressing that men 
would seek relief in dissolution. 

Adam’s transgression did not bring physical 
death to him and his posterity as a heritage and 
a penalty. 4 He died in the day he sinned according 
to the divine prediction, but his death at that time 
was spiritual, for he lived many years afterward. 
Undoubtedly the moral corruption “engendered” in 
his nature by wilful iniquity is noticed in his 
descendants, for evil tendencies can be perpetuated 
by generation. A person may inherit mental, as 
well as physical, characteristics that were conspic¬ 
uous in his ancestors. 

Original sin was not the cause of Adam’s 
physical death. Scriptural references to his death 
as a consequence of his sin have a bearing on his 
moral failure and its effect upon the divine plan, 
and do not refer to his natural death. Adam is 
used as an illustration or “figure” and all that are 
“in him” or like him, as wilful and persistent trans¬ 
gressors, when clear light is given, will die a 
spiritual death; but all that are “in Christ,” or like 


4 See p. 209 this chapter. 
192 



HELL AND MERCY 

Him, and continue as such, will be made gloriously 
alive. * 5 

Troubles that have their sources in our earthly 
environment, and in ourselves as mortals, are 
among the worst we have to bear; because in many 
instances it is impossible to avoid them. But the 
hell we make for ourselves, here or hereafter, by 
neglect or wrong doing, knowing the consequences, 
is something for which we are responsible and 
cannot be regarded as a necessary evil. It is plain, 
therefore, that a natural evil which we cannot avoid 
is something for which God only is responsible, 
unless it is what He could not prevent, and cannot 
remedy. 

Divine inflictions (so-called) are divine predic¬ 
tions which involve a warning and a chance to 
escape, or come out on the right side if the warn¬ 
ing is heeded, and the conditions fulfilled which 
are always within the bounds of possibility. This 
may not always mean exemption from suffering and 
trouble of many kinds in this life, or a painful 
death. 6 

8 Rom. v. 14. I. Cor. xv. 21-22. See p. 209 of this chapter, 

on the physical immortality of Adam. 

6 Those passages in the Bible which seem to make God the 
author of evil of any kind, including inflictions, should not 
193 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


It will be conceded that the Author and Ruler 
of the Universe should have power, not only to 
judge obstinate offenders, but to pronounce sen¬ 
tence and remove them when they become a menace 
to society, or an intolerable nuisance. This is 
usually done through the operation of natural laws, 
and the verdicts of civilized nations. Thus in 
many cases “The voice of the people is the voice 
of God.” 

Unjust wars may be undertaken and succeed, for 
there are many things to be settled hereafter; but 
corrupt nations are often subdued and annihilated 
by those who are more worthy than themselves. 
This is in harmony with the divine plan. 

There are instances on record in which it seems 
that individuals, and even multitudes, were sud¬ 
denly struck down, smitten by divine vengeance, 
and thus perished under the hand of God. This 
will be understood when it is seen that physical 


be misunderstood, such as: Multiplying Eve’s sorrow, harden¬ 
ing Pharaoh’s heart, or doing anything that seems to be un¬ 
just or unreasonable. A careful investigation may show that 
there is something in the translation or ancient idiom that 
should be noticed. If the statement is plain, then the con¬ 
sequences of resisting what is right, and known to be right, 
are indicated, and the sufferers are responsible for their mis¬ 
fortunes. 


194 



HELL AND MERCY 


life is sustained and continued in and through the 
divine will and approval. Therefore, He can, and 
should, when it is expedient, withdraw His support 
from those who are deliberately and maliciously 
opposing Him and themselves, knowing the con¬ 
sequences. So Ananias fell, and Saul, the King 
of Israel, Korah and his company, the Assyrian 
host, and others. Pestilence, blindness, diseases, 
and other afflictions may come as a means of 
restraint or removal when other means have failed. 
They were said to be “sent,” and with such warn¬ 
ing and explanation it was well understood that 
they could have been avoided. 

Among natural evils that are apparently without 
remedy, and must be tolerated, are the unwelcome 
changes in climate and weather that are so common. 

It is evident that we need variety, but we do not 
want, and it is not easy to prove that we need, 
disagreeable, distressing, unseasonable, destructive, 
and unhealthy changes. The weather is a source 
of perplexity, disappointment, and misery in nearly 
all parts of the world. In some places it is more 
reliable and interesting; but the disagreeable time 
comes in the most favorable locality. 

If we could migrate, like the birds, to fairer 
195 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


climes at the right season, we should rejoice, but 
the vast majority will always find this impracticable. 
Why shouldn’t the weather be as reliable as the 
sun, or as satisfactory as the purest water spring¬ 
ing from a perennial source? 

The weather, in any locality, is the result of 
changes, so numerous, complex and obscure, that 
the most astute meteorologist finds great difficulty 
in analyzing the causes of certain conditions; for 
this reason we cannot always see why they affect 
us unfavorably. It would be impossible to suit 
every one, because opinions are so different, and 
requirements various and innumerable. 

We are more capable of protecting ourselves, as 
the world becomes more intelligent, and with the 
co-operation, wisdom, and ability that is now 
rapidly developing, one may confidently expect that 
great relief and comfort will come in a compara¬ 
tively short time; for we shall be able to modify, 
counteract, and neutralize the effects of bad weather 
to .such an extent that interferences with business 
or pleasure, suffering and loss of life, will be 
greatly diminished. 

There are some problems in nature which God 
has left for humanity to solve. Many things 
196 


HELL AND MERCY 


might have been done that have been overlooked, 
or neglected, from the beginning. Too much time 
has been wasted in speculation on what has been 
regarded as mysterious and inevitable. 

That which makes the weather is associated with 
the atmosphere—a great aerial ocean surging 
around the globe. Climate depends upon the 
earth’s position, shape, and motions, and is mod¬ 
ified by surroundings. Great changes have occurred 
in the past. The climate and the weather have 
varied as the earth was adjusted and readjusted 
in its orbit, so as to get the most desirable results; 
and in every instance the change has been more 
favorable to all that concerned the interests of 
humanity, and still there is opportunity for im¬ 
provement, and it will be obvious as soon as it is 
possible, for the Creator is progressive in His 
works as well as His revelations. Though infinite 
He is not limited by his perfections, and can do 
better for Himself and for us when certain con¬ 
ditions are fulfilled, which may involve long periods 
of time if we can judge the future by the past; 
and it is reasonable to believe that in some respects 
we can. Geology shows us that the formation of 
the earth was a gradual process, and changes 


197 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


required periods remarkable for their duration. 
When all things are considered we may conclude 
that the weather is the best we can have now. 

The prevalence of insect pests, vermin, noxious 
weeds, and poison is something very different for 
our consideration, for they seem to be creations , and 
should have some use that justifies their produc¬ 
tion and continuance in a world like ours. While 
dangerous atmospheric phenomena such as cyclones, 
storms, and lightning may be attributed to defective 
conditions f with these things it is otherwise. Con¬ 
ceding that they may have their uses, yet the evils 
they inflict are very grievous. 

It is said that the mosquito is a scavenger in the 
early stages of its career, feeding on baneful matter 
in the water, thus purifying the air. If so, why 
should it be furnished with ability to torture mil¬ 
lions of human beings, and spread contagious 
diseases by inoculation? 

The mischief done by vermin and parasites is 
incalculable, and by general consent and approval 
they would be exterminated if possible. Unneces¬ 
sary weeds and poisons would share the same fate. 

Those who have studied carefully and wisely the 
history of our planet depending upon such evidences 
198 


HELL AND MERCY 


as they have found on the surface and in the 
interior, have come to the conclusion that its age 
is very great. Millions of years elapsed before 
human beings appeared, and man is comparatively 
a modern creation. For many ages it seems to 
have been a marine world, in which vast masses 
of ice drifting over the unborn continents, and 
islands settling at times in warmer latitudes, and 
leaving the debris of countless centuries in the 
depths of the primeval Ocean; or, pushing on as 
floating islands of rock and earth and ice, ground 
their huge sides against projecting mountains leav¬ 
ing marks that have never been erased to tell the 
story of chaos and pristine horror. 

Gradually, very gradually, came the transitions 
of those remote periods. 

If the most intelligent people had lived in those 
times, capable of making accurate observations, 
preserving them and transmitting them to their 
posterity for many thousands of years, nothing 
would have been perceptible about which they could 
be positive by comparison with former times con¬ 
cerning climate, the permanent recession of the 
Ocean from the land, or the earth's position in its 
orbit. No records of much value to us could have 
199 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


been made, and yet the earth was passing through 
these changes; but so slowly did they come that 
they could not have been perceived by the most 
discriminating observers, because the entire historic 
period (including all that has been found by 
archaeologists in the ruins of former generations 
concerning the remote past), is as a moment of 
time when compared with one of those vast cycles 
recorded in the stony archives of the everlasting 
hills. 

Changes are occurring now as rapidly as they 
were then that may be imperceptible to us. They 
involve the gradual removal of all that is objec¬ 
tionable. 

Mysterious and obnoxious remainders from 
sources that have not been explored have come 
down to us. These cannot be regarded as bless¬ 
ings in disguise from the divine Being, serving a 
purpose of which we are ignorant, for He could 
not give us anything that would be an injury to 
us rather than a benefit. If He did He could not 
truthfully be called divine. 

There are some things that have been useful in 
the past which are not only useless, but pernicious 
novo, and their removal is being accomplished more 


200 


HELL AND MERCY 


rapidly at this time than at any period in history. 
The amelioration and destruction of that which 
involves suffering and loss for humanity is a dis¬ 
tinguishing characteristic of the age. And if a 
natural evil is a work of the Creator, the most 
devout and intelligent people in the world do not 
have much respect for such works of His hands. 

Many pestiferous insects and parasites that 
afflict us, and injure vegetation, originated long 
before the creation of man, when the earth was a 
vast wilderness for millions of years. They have 
continued, and adapting themselves to their new 
environment, have become an intolerable nuisance. 

The same may be said of many species of 
rodentia, or gnawing animals that infest our lands 
and dwellings, as well as venomous reptiles, ten¬ 
acious and useless growths, and that which serves 
no worthy purpose and is in the way. 

We are slowly passing out of the old world 
which began with the appearance of human beings 
in a wilderness that beggared all description, not 
only because of its extent and appalling dangers, 
but because of the limited resources of its primitive 
inhabitants, as well as their inexperience and tend¬ 
ency to neglect those things that lead to the 


201 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


development of civilization, good government, 
mental and moral progress. 

Primitive races had advantages, for they began 
in favorable localities. Being uncorrupted by pre¬ 
ceding generations and thus open to divine impres¬ 
sions, they could do well . 7 But there was heavy 
pioneer work to be done which was, in many 
instances, avoided, because a wild and predatory 
life seemed easier and more congenial. Sometimes 
they failed to lay the right foundations and were 
demoralized, and in time became barbarous. 
Emerging after thousands of years from the savage 
state, and having religious aspirations, they fell into 
paganism, with its imaginary deities, and elaborate 
systems of error, or remained men of the forests 
and mountains as we find them to-day, wretched 
and beastly. Happily for us the death-knell of 
paganism has sounded, and the time is rapidly 
approaching when a savage man will be a rare living 
curiosity. 

The march of progress has been impeded by 
indifference and neglect. The period of genuine 
advancement, general, or in any sense world-wide, 
is very short. It is limited to a few centuries in 

7 Gen. ii. 


202 



HELL AND MERCY 


which the rights and privileges of nations have 
been somewhat respected by one another. The idea 
that “we are the people, and foreign nations are 
barbarians” is not entertained as in former times. 
The interests of commerce and civilization, modified 
by Christianity, have produced a great change. 
The settlement of differences by arbitration, or 
skillful diplomacy, is eagerly sought; and wars of 
conquest for the gratification of selfish ambition 
or national glory are few and far between. 

The time for cosmopolitan co-operation has come, 
and it is being considered by the great nations of 
the earth. And yet w r ar, at times, will be inevitable, 
for there is no other method of settling some griev¬ 
ances. Powerful and prosperous nations are 
anxious for more room and valuable territory, and 
many think they are justified in fighting for it; 
but this will be avoided in most cases, because the 
necessity of having amicable relations with other 
leading nations is clearly seen, and the fear of 
arousing jealousy and animosity, and thus entan¬ 
gling themselves, will help to keep them within 
proper limits. 

The world has become rich and intelligent, and 
is looking for better things and finding them. 


205 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


Heavy pioneer work can now be done rapidly and 
well, for we have the facilities, and are anxious 
to do it. The rubbish of pre-historic ages must go. 
The log hut on the premises of a millionaire is a 
“creation,” but it was not created for him. It was 
useful a hundred and fifty years ago, but it has 
become a nuisance, and he orders its removal that 
the ground may be clear for the erection of a 
splendid villa, with all modern improvements. The 
crocodile is a descendant of amphibious monsters 
that swarmed as thickly as autumn leaves in for¬ 
mative ages, long before the earth was ready for 
human habitation. It is a creation by the divine 
Being, but it was not created for our use or edifi¬ 
cation. 

Much of the luxuriant vegetation, rank, cheap 
and useless to us now, has disappeared under 
climatic changes, wisely ordered, which we could 
not produce; as well as myriads of animals, ter¬ 
restrial, amphibious or marine, which would be 
useless now, together with insects, reptiles, and 
birds, dangerous, venomous, or otherwise, having 
a purpose which was important, but has been 
fulfilled. 

In this way the soil was made deep, rich, and 


204 


HELL AND MERCY 


permanent for our use, and valuable materials 
imbedded in its depths, such as coal and oil and 
amber. 

Stone for building was also produced under the 
action of water, firm and durable, or delicate ' 
marbles from which rare artistic creations rise 
under the sculptor’s hand. And clay, washed from 
the rocks under the action of the sun and frost, out 
of which the cities spring, towering high above the 
crowded avenues in stately splendor and magnifi¬ 
cence. 

The removal of all evils from the world, both 
natural and spiritual, is contemplated by the 
Creator, but our part in the process is very impor¬ 
tant. It involves wisdom and judgment, coupled 
with careful attention and longing for divine sug¬ 
gestions, or impressions, known to be genuine after 
testing analysis, and actual demonstration by 
experience. It will take a long time to do it, but 
it can be done. 

The student of natural theology should no longer 
dwell upon the goodness and benevolence of God 
as seen in His works, while attempting to justify 
Him in the maintenance of some abominable nuis¬ 
ance; stating that “it is undoubtedly a good thing; 

205 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


though we cannot regard it as such, nevertheless, 
we should believe that it is, and that it serves an 
important purpose, for it must be a good thing or 
it would not exist.” 

A writer on this subject says: “Of all the ser¬ 
pentine family, some twenty-six species only are 
poisonous; of these the viper, the hooded snake, 
and the rattlesnake are the most deadly. The 
venomous fangs of these animals present the most 
striking exhibitions of mechanical contrivance in 
all animated nature. The purpose of the Creator 
in calling into existence animals so malignant and 
endowing them with powers so deadly is a question 
involved in much darkness and difficulty. On this 
recondite subject we can only say that from the 
benevolence which pervades the general designs of 
creation we ought also to presume that if we fully 
understood all the ends accomplished in the economy 
of nature by these venomous reptiles, we should 
see and acknowledge that God was as wise and 
good in their creation as in that of any other ani¬ 
mated beings .” 8 Presumption in this case is not 
warranted, for the safety and happiness of human 
beings is of more consequence than any purpose 

* Rev. Herbert W. Morris, “Science and the Bible,” p. 519. 

206 



, , HELL AND MERCY 

in the “economy of nature” which venomous rep¬ 
tiles can serve in this age. 

The time has come for the solution of many 
problems that have confronted humanity from the 
beginning. The removal of an evil by miracle 
would be a mistake unless such evil could not be 
removed, or overcome, by intelligent human co-oper¬ 
ation. For such miracle would leave us in mystery, 
obscurity, and doubt unless we could appreciate its 
value, and have a proper understanding concerning 
it. Unless our part were done, the conditions met, 
and the lessons deeply impressed, it would not be 
expedient; for in that way we could not be educated 
and lifted into the superior realms of intelligence 
and purity. We are not developed without struggle 
and thoughtful effort wisely directed. Some of the 
most favored spots on earth are inhabited by miser¬ 
able and degenerate races. 

It is said that St. Patrick drove all the snakes out 
of Ireland. And many good people believe this to 
be true. But men of ability are not anxious to 
know how he did it. They believe that profound 
study and concentration of mental energy on some 
evil, and on the best way to remove or overcome 
it, may result in discovery and invention, and when 
20 7 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


success comes they seek capital and combination., 
and all the light they can get from all sources, 
and when the way is clear they act, and the work 
is done. 

Soon there is a greater demand for more work 
of this kind, for the world wants it and can afford 
to pay for it. More capital is needed, and is found, 
and a greater syndicate organized, and much more 
accomplished. The time is coming when syndicates, 
or trusts, of the right kind, will have millions of 
stockholders, and employ millions of men, and 
billions of money. They will combine and re-com¬ 
bine, and sweep away great natural evils from the 
earth. They will actually overcome, neutralize, 
drive out, exterminate, or annihilate, one nuisance 
after another, thus clearing the world of objection¬ 
able things, purifying the cities, and redeeming 
lands and unhealthy localities, until the entire habit¬ 
able globe will be a paradise when compared with 
what it was in former times. 

Why have we pain, deformity and disease, or any 
abnormal condition, affecting body or mind un¬ 
favorably ? 

The credulity of humanity is surprising, especially 
when a mystery is associated with some important 
208 


HELL AND MERCY 


truth. There is a tendency to believe too much. 
This is not confined to the ignorant and superficial, 
but it affects the wise and judicious. Especially 
is this the case when error is woven into a system 
of theology, for it seems to have a vital relation 
to other parts of the system. And if, after critical 
examination, and reconsideration, it does not appear 
to be reasonable or right; nevertheless it is regarded 
by many as a stone in the “noble edifice of doctrine" 
which has been accepted without hesitation for 
many years, and “perhaps it would not be advis¬ 
able to remove it,” for it has become “venerable 
and sacred” to the people; and, therefore, if it does 
not seem clear and important “the less said about 
it the better.” 

The moral effect of Adam’s sin upon himself is 
recorded in the third chapter of Genesis. His mis¬ 
fortunes, also resulting from his depraved con¬ 
dition, are predicted and described. But nothing 
is said concerning physical or mental diseases that 
would affect him or his posterity as a consequence 
of his sin, and no allusion to anything of that kind 
is found in other parts of the Bible. His natural 
death, at an advanced age, is noticed in the fifth 
chapter; but there are frequent references to his 


209 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


moral death, and the lessons to be derived from it . 9 
And yet there are people who confidently believe 
that there would be no diseases in the world if 
Adam had not failed. That he was responsible for 
these troubles, and if he had been true to himself 
and to God he would be alive and well to-day, and 
that he would be free from pain or disease, and 
that he could not be injured mortally, or in any 
way that would involve suffering or death so long 
as he continued faithful. 

They have overlooked the fact that some of 
Adam’s descendants might have failed if he had 
not, and thus introduced pain, deformity, and dis¬ 
ease, if they were caused by such failure. 

We know something about many natural evils, for 
we have studied their causes and their history. But 
why should Adam be held responsible for so much, 
or why should we conclude that all these things 
would be unknown if “sin had not entered into the 
world?” The mistake seems to have arisen from 


9 In Romans, v. 12 and context there is a reference to 
Adam’s failure which has been generally misunderstood. It 
is evident that the Apostle refers to Adam’s spiritual death 
in the 12th verse, as we consider the 15th verse and the con¬ 
cluding words of the chapter. “Death” means here what it 
does in Gen. ii. 17. 


210 



HELL AND MERCY 


a misunderstanding concerning the meaning of 
“death” in this connection, which represents the 
moral and spiritual consequences of Adam’s sin, 
but does not refer to his exit from this world, or 
to natural evils. 

Remarkable for its absurdity is the belief of some 
concerning the fate of what is known as the “Ser¬ 
pent” and his posterity . 10 It is certain that the 
“Serpent” was a spiritual devil. But it cannot be 
shown that he entered into a living snake, or animal 


10 Gen. iii. 

Ideas concerning physical or corporeal immortality are 
expressed in the concluding chapter of this book. The im¬ 
possibility of immunity from casualty or death while in the 
natural body is there shown. Paul refers to the consequences 
of man’s moral failure when he says: “By man came death.’’ 
He means spiritual ruin } known as death in Gen. ii. 17, to 
which he evidently referred, for in the next verse he speaks 
of all dying who are “in Adam,” or who are as he was, weak 
and wicked. This he contrasts with a heavenly resurrection 
or immortal life, which all will enjoy who are “in Christ.”— 
I. Cor. xv. 21-22. The corporeal immortality of Adam seems 
to have been inferred from Gen. iii. 19, “for dust thou art and 
unto dust shalt thou return.” It is thought that he had for¬ 
feited the privilege of remaining forever in the natural body; 
but this is not clear. It is probable that he did deprive him¬ 
self of a privilege and great honor, which was designed for 
him, and which a few of his descendants obtained, among 
whom were Enoch, Elijah and Christ, whose material bodies 
did not see corruption. See Ch. viii. 

3il 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


of any kind, and thus disguised conversed with 
Eve. 

It has been supposed that “the serpent” was a 
“beast of the field,” probably a quadruped, possibly 
an ape; at least, an animal, very sagacious and 
intelligent. And that immediately after it had 
sinned, by co-operating with the devil, who had 
tempted Eve, it was transformed and became a 
loathsome snake, crawling on its belly and feeding 
on dust. 11 

A writer on this subject says: 12 “And for the 
more successful accomplishment of his malicious 
design, he (the devil) employed the agency of a 
serpent. To us, at this day, this creature, a loath¬ 
some reptile, may appear a most unsuitable instru¬ 
ment for the purpose. But we must remember that 
the .Scripture teaches us that the serpent is not now 
what it then was. It is now in a form and in a 
state of degradation. This is the point of interest. 

“The Hebrew name given to the serpent in thL 
place is ‘nahash,’ ” a term signifying discernment, 
sagacity. The original name, therefore, of this 


11 An animal or reptile cannot commit sin or be judged 
as a sinner. 

12 “Science and the Bible,” p. 526. H. W. Morris. D.D. 


212 



HELL AND MERCY 


creature plainly indicates one of more than ordinary 
intellect, and not a stupid reptile. And the sacred 
narrative expressly states that the creatures here 
intended stood at the head of the animal creation, 
and was the most subtle or sagacious of all the 
beasts which the Lord God had made. We have, 
therefore, grounds to believe that this animal was 
not of its present serpentine character before the 
fall of man. But immediately after that sad event, 
and in consequence of its instrumental connection 
with it, and for a memento to man of his own fall 
and degradation it was transformed and degraded 
into such a reptile as we now behold it. In the 
beginning it stood chief among the brute creation, 
but from the day of man’s fall it became a vile and 
creeping thing. “Upon thy belly shalt thou go, 
and dust shalt thou eat, all the days of thy life. 
... In the crawling serpent then we have a per¬ 
petual remembrancer even to the end of time that 
we are the fallen offspring of a fallen parent.” 13 

Notice that the one who beguiled Eve was not 
assisted by a serpent or animal of any kind. He 
was called “the serpent” because of his methods . 
By comparison he is said to have been “more subtle” 


“Author’s italics in the above quotation. 

213 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


than any beast of the field . 14 The efforts of a 
serpent in taking its prey are very skillful. It can 
attract the attention of a bird by peculiar motions, 
and then fascinate, or charm, its victim, which 
flutters and cries at first, but seems to be helpless, 
and is easily taken by its deadly foe. 

This insidious spiritual deceiver was called a 
“serpent” because the name in a figurative sense 
described his character and its efforts, which were 
well understood by Eve when she listened to his 
suggestions and allowed him to control her motives, 
knowing at the time that he was a “serpent” in 
this sense, as a bad man is a viper . 15 She stated 
that fact when inquiry was made concerning the 


14 Nowhere in this narrative do we find that the devil acted 
in or used a natural serpent when he beguiled Eve. Those 
who have thought that “the serpent” was a mysterious creature 
now extinct may have inferred this from Gen. iii. i, “Now the 
serpent was more subtle than any beast of the field, which the 
Lord God had made.” Here it is not stated that he was a 
beast; but that he was more subtle than any animal in crea¬ 
tion. So when it is stated that he was “cursed” or degraded 
above all cattle, we are not to infer that he had been a quad¬ 
ruped. “Serpent” is used here as it is in Rev. xii. 9 and 
xx. 2, v/here he is called the “old serpent”; but this should 
not lead us to conclude that the devil of Eden was the devil 
of the Apocalypse. See p. 238. 

15 Matt. iii. 7. A serpent was the common symbol of a 
deadly, malicious and' subtle enemy. Gen. xlix. 17. Luke x. 19. 

214 



HELL AND MERCY 


temptation and showed no regret on account of her 
failure, but a tendency to cherish a vile spiritual 
delusion by which Adam also was wrecked. 

Unfortunately some commentator on this part of 
the Scriptures has introduced a natural or real 
serpent and given it ability to talk; also granting 
it a moral nature, for it is judged as a sinner accord¬ 
ing to this view. This “beautiful and intelligent 
creature” suddenly loses its attractiveness and 
becomes a crawling reptile. This misconception 
seems so plausible that it has fastened itself upon 
the religious world and is regarded as a fact. This 
infliction (it is supposed) has a “great purpose” 
that man may be reminded of his sin as well as 
Adam’s whenever he beholds a serpent, including, 
of course, the whole order Ophidae, from the huge 
boa-constrictor to the most diminutive snakelet. 

This is a monumental blunder. The inspired 
writer used a common figure of rhetoric when he 
called this devil a “serpent,” as a stupid fellow is 
called “an ass,” or a shrewd man “a fox,” or a 
mischievous and deceitful person, “a snake in the 
grass.” 

A prediction concerning the contemptible weak¬ 
ness and misery which this subtle and wicked spirit 
215 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


had brought upon himself is also couched in figura¬ 
tive terms . 16 He is to sink lower and feed on dust. 

It is evident that this spiritual serpent had been 
a man in the natural world, for there is a refer¬ 
ence to his “seed/’ or descendants who would come 
into conflict with the “seed,” or descendants of the 
woman. Children are not born in the other world, 
therefore the posterity of this person called “the 
serpent,” whether living or dead, must have been 
produced in this world. And whether we regard 
the enmity and conflict between the descendants of 
Eve, and those of the tempter as a struggle between 
natural and spiritual foes or not, the devil of Eden 
is found to be a man who had formerly lived in the 
natural state . 17 

If we believe that diseases of all kinds, deformity, 
pain, and the numerous ills of the flesh, as well as 


16 Gen. iii. 14. 

1T See Ch. vi., p. 79. “Seed” has the same meaning in both 
instances. Gen. iii. 15. 

A spiritual devil may be called a “father” of hypocrites or 
the “father” of a lie, in a sense well understood. But when 
there is a reference to his “seed” or natural descendants the 
case is different, for it reveals his human origin. 

He may also be called a “liar” and “a murderer from the 
beginning,” but this would not necessarily take us back to the 
days of Adam, but to the beginning of the said devil’s wicked 
career. 


216 



HELL AND MERCY 


mental disorders, appeared for the first time when 
Adam failed, or subsequent to his failure as a 
natural consequence of his transgression, thus 
making the whole human family liable to these 
evils, we believe too much; for we find that animals, 
and even vegetation, are often affected by some of 
these calamities. We find also that there is some¬ 
thing in the air, and water, in climate and locality, 
that is hurtful and may produce disease. 

If we conclude that this state of things is the result 
of a divine curse that began to affect all nature 
unfavorably when sin appeared in Adam, and that 
it will continue to be effective, producing misery 
and suffering in the whole creation for an indefinite 
period, we have a conception of the justice and 
mercy of God that is not very satisfactory to some 
people. It might be regarded as the effort of an 
inexorable tyrant, cruel and vindictive. 

It is certain that many of these evils could be 
avoided or remedied if we were more thoughtful 
and careful; but what shall we say of the millions 
who do not think intelligently, because they do not, 
and cannot, understand? 

If a person has congenital deformity, or inherited 
disease, he is not responsible for it. It may be 
217 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


regarded as something arising from defective con¬ 
ditions, for the same thing may be observed in 
animals. Plants are often deformed and weak. 
Even when conditions are favorable this cannot 
always be avoided. It cannot be proven in every 
instance that those who preceded us were respon¬ 
sible for our misfortunes of this kind, even if we 
could trace our genealogy back to Adam, and had 
full and accurate knowledge of our antecedents 
from the beginning. 

That many diseases have arisen from a con¬ 
scious, or unconscious, violation of nature’s laws, 
is certain, and that many more have sprung from 
defective conditions in nature , cannot be success¬ 
fully denied. That all nature, including man, col¬ 
lectively and individually is in a state of evolution 
in which the “survival of the fittest” is a governing 
principle is obvious. Therefore, nature is not only 
incomplete, but in many respects imperfect. 

If new creations, remedial measures and changes 
were occurring constantly, they might not be per¬ 
ceptible to us, because human life and the period 
of authentic history are so short when compared 
with the time necessarily required for such work. 

We do not limit the power of God, or His ability 
218 


HELL AND MERCY 


to accomplish his purposes at the right time when 
we understand that his work, in and upon, nature 
involves a very gradual process. The reasons for 
this may not be apparent to us, nevertheless we 
can see that it is so. As we study nature, and look 
into the origin of things, we find that cosmic 
changes and developments occupied more time than 
we can measure or comprehend. And so we have 
criteria by which we can judge the future, and 
believe, if God is God, that He is as anxious to 
supply deficiencies, and remove evils in nature, as 
we are to see it done. 

The work of redeeming and purifying humanity 
is more easily accomplished when the conditions 
are fulfilled and understood than any process in 
nature with which we are not directly, or con¬ 
sciously associated, because there is in mind that 
which is very responsive to divine impressions. 
There are astonishing possibilities in us. Mental 
and physical transformations can occur in us, or 
through our co-operation, speedily. Miraculous 
phenomena in human beings, or their environment, 
have been produced in this way. The combined 
force exerted by the divine and human will, when 
all conditions are met, is immense. Herein is 


219 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


power over matter that cannot be obtained from 
other sources. In this way diseases have been 
cured, the dead restored to life, deformity corrected, 
storms controlled, material substance produced for 
food and drink, waters divided and held back, rocks 
cloven from which streams gushed forth, the spir¬ 
itual world opened and its secrets revealed . 18 

It is certain that God can accomplish some things 
with human co-operation that cannot be done with¬ 
out it, and herein lies the hope of humanity, and 
of God, for their interests are mutual. 

The supernatural realm is being explored by very 
intelligent people. There is much confusion and 
uncertainty and some danger, but good results are 
sure to come. When delusions and sentimental 
theories concerning the spiritual world, together 
with modern sorcery and charlatanism are swept 
away, we shall listen more wisely for divine sug¬ 
gestions and look for manifestations from the 
celestial state, and the golden age of open vision 
will be ushered in, and many evils of this life, that 
have perplexed us long, will rapidly disappear, for 
we shall have the ability to overcome and remove 
them. 

18 Bible. 


220 



HELL AND MERCY 


There is mercy for all who are able to receive it. 
There is no condition in this life, or in the depths 
of the invisible hell, that is not carefully considered 
by the One who feels the deepest interest in 
humanity. It is not easy for us to see why suffer¬ 
ing is not relieved until we know the cause of it. 
If the source of a woe is removed then trouble of 
that kind must cease; but every attempt to relieve 
or palliate distress, when there is a strong deter¬ 
mination on the part of the sufferer to cherish the 
cause of it, is folly. 

Thousands are now suffering in the hells of our 
great cities for whom little, or nothing, can be done, 
because relief furnishes them with capital and 
encouragement which they use in the cultivation and 
perpetuation of their abominable vices. It is evi¬ 
dent that they prefer the misery and degradation 
associated with their crimes, rather than the com¬ 
forts and honors that come to those who are 
anxious to do well by doing right. They are willing 
to have time and money spent for them, and may 
seem to be grateful, but secretly they despise reform, 
and reveal this fact when they have opportunity 
by taking mean advantages of their benefactors, 
and doing worse. Others, who have wealth and 


221 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


can gratify their depraved passions and cruel lusts, 
are often more foul and desperately wicked. 

There is nothing that can prevent a person from 
being as bad as he wants to be. He may not be 
able to express his purposes, or execute his designs, 
but he can dwell upon his intentions and cherish 
his ideas, and thus mentally commit every crime 
in a complete catalogue, and then invent something 
worse and study it, and entertain the most skillful 
methods of doing it. In this way he can become 
more corrupt and capable of the most vile and 
damnable deeds. 

Thousands upon thousands of such men and 
women are in the prisons of the world; and if 
released they are often more dangerous to society 
than they were before they were confined. This 
shows that there are people who will not be re¬ 
strained by anything. Their moral decline is con¬ 
stant and rapid. If such persons continue to be, in 
the future state what they are in this life, it is easy to 
see that for them hell is necessarily eternal. And in 
that eternal hell they can have no cause for com¬ 
plaint, because it is their choice, from which there 
is no deviation. 

If they cannot be restrained or reformed in this 
life, who can show that it is possible in the next? 


222 


HELL AND MERCY 


It is not possible unless it is desirable to them. 
And who can show that it ever has been, or ever 
will be desirable to some people? For reformation 
involves genuine repentance, and the love of right¬ 
eousness for its own sake, which has been thor¬ 
oughly tested and found to be a dominating prin¬ 
ciple, controlling the life. 

Those who seek relief from suffering while under 
pressure in which they have involved themselves by 
wrong doing, are not always sincere. When they 
are made comfortable they are often worse than 
ever. Relief for those who are not prepared to 
take it may be offered by good people whose sym¬ 
pathies are aroused as they notice the distress of 
others, who are responsible for their misfortunes 
and are opposed to any righteous course that will 
help them. This is a common mistake. Aid and 
comfort given to those who will use it against 
themselves is putting a premium on misery. 

This is illustrated in the celebrated parable of 
Lazarus and the rich man who had died: “And in 
hell he lifted up his eyes being in torments .” 19 
This miserable wreck of folly and dissipation was 
still burning with corrupt desires and perverted 


19 Luke xvi. 19-31. 
223 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


passions. He appealed to Abraham for relief, but 
without success. Abraham reminded him of his 
dissolute and selfish past, stating that an impass¬ 
able gulf was fixed between him and paradise. It 
was well understood by those who listened to this 
parable that the rich man was responsible for the 
“gulf,” which he had fixed and made impassable 
by his foul condition , for which he had no regrets. 

While the means of gratification are not found 
in the infernal state, the same fixed tendency is 
maintained in spite of the consequences. There is 
not a single instance of repentance or reform in 
hell on record. While appeals are noticed they are 
refused for reasons either given or implied. There¬ 
fore, suffering in the spiritual hell is voluntary. 
No relief is desired if genuine repentance and 
reform are understood. Nothing arouses such 
bitter antagonism as this. The most terrible and 
unmitigated agony is preferred. 

Those who understand that hell is a compulsory 
condition are not sustained by the Scriptures. 
The predictions and commands of God should not 
be interpreted in such a way as to imply force, or 
coercion on His part, irrespective of the motives 
and purposes of those who are judged . 20 That He 


,0 See Ch. i, p. n. 
224 



HELL AND MERCY 


is angry with those who oppose what is right, and 
so oppose themselves and His plans, cannot be 
doubted. He is displeased and indignant. He 
excludes such persons from the privileges which 
they might enjoy if they were different. We 
should not have much respect for His administra¬ 
tion if He did not. But He is not unreasonable, 
or vindictive. He is always open to sincere appeal. 
If He were not we could not consistently call Him 
our divine Father, 

There has been some misunderstanding on this 
subject. There are good and thoughtful people 
who are not inclined to say much about “future 
punishment,” for to them it seems that the justice 
of God is somewhat doubtful and mysterious; and 
there is reason for their reticence that appears, when 
we consider their interpretation of such a passage 
as the following: “And fear not them which kill 
the body, but are not able to kill the soul: but 
rather fear him which is able to destroy both soul 
and body in hell .” 21 

n Gehenna, a Greek word, here stands for the worst and 
final hell of the other world. Matt. x. 28. 

Hades, another Greek word, translated “hell” in the old 
English version, means the state of the dead, whether good 
or bad. 


225 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The question arises, Who is this person who is 
able to destroy both soul and body in hell? Look¬ 
ing into what seems to be a reliable commentary 
the reader finds that God is able to do this . 22 And 
that in this text we have a “decisive proof” that 
the natural body of the deceased will be restored 
later, and he will be in it again and will be tor¬ 
mented, soul and C( material” body, forever, in hell, 
by Almighty God! 

There is no authority for supposing that God does 
such work, either in this text or in any other part 
of the Bible. In this passage our Saviour warned 
His disciples against a spiritual enemy who was 
very active at that time. He had already been 
tempted by him in the wilderness, forty days and 
nights; and had returned victorious, but well 
acquainted with his subtle suggestions and fatal 
designs. In spite of this timely warning and many 
tender remonstrances one of their number soon 
began to yield to temptation, and finally let this 
devil in, and at whose suggestion he betrayed his 
Master, took his own life, and sank into the hell 
he had prepared for himself . 23 

72 Jamieson, Fausset and Brown; also many other popular 
commentaries. 

33 Acts i. 25. Judas. 



HELL AND MERCY 


God does not prepare hell for any one. It is 
prepared by those who take it, here and hereafter. 
His work is of another kind. He prepares heaven 
for those who prepare themselves for it . 24 

The resurrection of persons who are not heavenly 
in their tastes and aspirations is noticed in the 
Bible. It is a resurrection “unto shame and ever¬ 
lasting contempt.” It involves the “second death,” 
which is moral destruction. Of course, the physical 
body is not restored. This is nowhere asserted in 
the Scriptures. But men, good and bad, appear, 
in spiritual bodies, soon after death. This is seen 
in the parable of the Rich Man and Lazarus, which 
is a representation of the facts as Christ understood 
them. The rich man, in the other world, has eyes 
and a tongue, and Lazarus a finger. The appear¬ 
ance of a bad man after death is not described. He 
may be represented in vision, or in figure as a 
“beast” or a “serpent,” but there is no definite 
description of him as a man or as a devil . 25 But 
descriptions of heavenly men, or angels, are numer¬ 
ous and interesting. 

There is a reason for this. A ruined man in the 
spiritual state is incapable of such manifestations. 


“John xiv. 2. 


227 


*® Rev. xx. 2. 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


He may be able to produce impressions upon others 
who do not know the source of them, or introduce 
suggestions that will be entertained by those who 
are susceptible to bad influences. But in time he 
will become so weak and degraded that he will be 
unable to do even this, and will finally sink into 
the depths of infernal obscurity and do very little 
harm to any one except himself., 

Spiritual perdition involves a living death, and 
at length a burial in the mud of the centuries. 

The devil of Eden should not be regarded as the 
same devil who tempted Christ in the wilderness 
thousands of years afterward. For the “Serpent” 
of the Adamic Paradise sank so low, and became 
so weak and contemptible after the spiritual seduc¬ 
tion of Eve that, in figurative terms, he could do 
nothing but crawl hopelessly in the dust and feed 
thereon forever. 

The Satan of Christ’s time, who was so active 
during his ministry, was “cast out” according to 
divine prediction . 26 His final dethronement occurred 
after the ruin of Judas and was noticed at the time 
of our Saviour’s resurrection . 27 Other satans arose 
and fell in apostolic times, and undoubtedly there 

27 Luke x. 18. John xii. 31. 

228 


M John xii. 31. 



HELL AND MERCY 


is a Satan more or less prominent in every age, 
who is capable of doing much evil when an oppor¬ 
tunity is given him; but his power diminishes in 
proportion to the bad influence he exerts, and he 
finally sinks into contempt and oblivion . 28 

It is difficult for those who are hopeful and feel 
a deep interest in humanity to believe that there is 
any one who could not be reformed if the right 
effort was made, and time enough allowed. But 
those who have studied the facts more carefully 
and wisely, and have had opportunity for wide 
observation and experience, find that there are many 
hopeless cases. 

The civilized countries of the world are full of 
self-made wrecks. They swarm in the great cities 
and are seen drifting through the rural districts 
by thousands. They constitute the sediment of 
society which generally settles to the bottom and 
stays there. They find nothing attractive in good¬ 
ness and purity. They glory in all kinds of law¬ 
lessness and crime, and suffer the consequences. 
They take hell here and hereafter, regardless of 
the cost, and finally become so corrupt that the 
thought of anything heavenly arouses animosity. 


“Rev. xx. io. 
229 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


They become in the other world what are known 
as devils . 29 The perversion of the moral nature is 
complete, and reform is out of the question. There 
is no mercy for those who do not want it. 

The strength of hell has been magnified by those 
who have not understood its weakness. It has 
power to ruin itself. Others are not involved with¬ 
out their consent. Resistance of evil strengthens 
and develops character. The most successful and 
happy people have fought hard battles, and felt the 
pressure of temptation. In attempting to destroy 
the most worthy of earth, hell has often revealed 
its depravity and ignorance and has given us the 
heroes and heroines of history. 

The hells of this life are constantly and rapidly 
sinking. We notice the reinforcements as they 
appear. They seem to be strong and overwhelm¬ 
ing. The numbers attract our attention. The 
seeming unity of purpose deceives us. There is a 
want of cohesion. Selfishness, fraud, villainy, envy, 
whoredom, dissipation, intemperance, and reckless¬ 
ness destroy confidence, and create isolation, pov¬ 
erty and disease. 

Many seek seclusion as they lose money and 


29 Or demons. 
230 



HELL AND MERCY 


character. Pride lingers when reputation is dead. 
They plunge into revolting excesses, and would 
bury themselves alive in dens of vice and infamy. 
They crowd prisons, asylums, and almshouses. 
They darken the columns of the papers with the 
records of murders, suicides, and crimes of every 
description. 

The power of the invisible hell should not be 
misunderstood. It is able to misrepresent and sim¬ 
ulate. It is difficult to detect and analyze the 
source of some impressions and suggestions, until 
clear divine light is obtained, when they may be 
easily understood and dismissed. 

Control by a spiritual enemy does not mean 
helpless infirmity, but a willingness to be used by 
him irrespective of his real character and motives 
which may be disguised. It implies, also, some 
sympathy with his views and purposes. This can 
be cultivated and stimulated until there is a oneness 
of motive and action that is diabolical. Thus the 
descent hell ward is accelerated. Nothing can break 
the infernal combination and release the victim but 
divine power; and this cannot be exerted unless 
it is earnestly desired. 

The feebleness of the perishing myriads in the 


231 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


dark, supernatural hell can be imagined, when we 
understand that effective organization for any pur¬ 
pose is impossible. Resources are not found. 
Hell means poverty and limitation. There is noth¬ 
ing to gain by combination; and no faith in those 
who would be leaders. Ability to corrupt others 
is of no consequence where all are vile. 

In the Gospels and Epistles the Satan of those 
times is called a “god,” or “prince of this world.” 
By this we may understand that he exerted a 
dominating influence over evil men; but it is not 
understood that he was recognized as a king, or 
chief, among them; or that there was, or ever has 
been any organized system of government under 
him, in this world or the other. He is called the 
“prince of the power of the air,” the spirit that now 
worketh in the children of disobedience, not because 
he had anything to do with atmospheric phenomena, 
but because he influenced persons high in authority 
in an age when emperors and governors were, in 
many instances, infernal in character and methods. 

Nothing new or valuable emanates from the 
hidden hell. Its inhabitants are not progressive. 
They do not entertain any ideas that would be 
useful or elevating to mankind. To emphasize and 
232 


HELL AND MERCY 


magnify our troubles, multiply our perplexities, 
intensify our discouragements, increase our doubts 
and fears, inflame our evil passions, rob us of hope, 
and paint the future in somber colors, is the effort 
of those who are in darkness and misery, and 
would drag us down, crowding in upon us as we 
give them opportunity ; antagonizing all that is true 
and heavenly; yet unable to corrupt us without 
our consent . 


*33 


XI 

DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 

The secrets of the unseen world are not more 
impenetrable than some that present themselves for 
our consideration here. 

A huge bowlder weighing thousands of tons lies 
on the plain. It is a conspicuous land-mark. It 
has a history, but who can read it ? Its age canno: 
be computed. The changes through which it has 
passed are many. The geologist offers a theory, 
and some probabilities, but this does not satisfy 
those who are looking for facts. It is a wonder 
of incomprehensible antiquity. A problem of the 
ages. 

Power to know more about objects in nature 
comes after observation and reflection, but the 
advantages are greater for the student of the spir¬ 
itual realm, because there is reliable revelation for 


234 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


him if he is disposed to accept it. And yet, the 
difficulty of comprehending and demonstrating truth 
from this source, evidently obscure, requires effort 
as patient, persistent, and intelligent as any that 
has ever been made by the most eminent naturalist, 
or explorer. Not only because such truth is hard 
to understand, but because of the limitations of 
language, and the difficulty in putting it into terms 
that can be readily interpreted. 

There is a tendency to rely upon the opinions of 
the great and learned who have preceded us, and 
this is best in many instances, for they have placed 
stepping-stones in the river of spiritual mystery 
which have enabled many a sincere inquirer to ford 
with safety its deep and dangerous waters. 

Sometimes these ultra-mundane pioneers have 
taken us into the middle of the stream, and stopped, 
giving us to understand that they could go no 
farther. And we have gloried in their mighty 
works and thought why should we go on? If 
intellectual giants, towering high above their con¬ 
temporaries, have failed, after a life-time of effort, 
why should we expect success? 

Again, they have taken us across by another 
route and left us in a wilderness of doubt concern- 
235 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


ing the reasonableness and consistency of their 
positions, which we have tried to fortify, in spite 
of misgivings, that we dare not express, and the 
world has looked on and wondered, and hesitated 
and finally concluded that there must be mistakes 
of some kind associated with such interpretations. 
Thus divine revelation has suffered, while the 
interests of humanity have not been promoted. 
But we should remember that the century is pro¬ 
gressive. And the great man of the past would 
be a little man of to-day, in some respects, if he 
did not know what had happened since his death, 
and was unable to catch the spirit of the age, and 
read the signs of the times. 

We need more definite ideas about heaven and 
hell. That there are degrees of promotion in the 
heavenly state that involve greater privileges, and 
honors, is generally believed. And that there are 
depths of degradation and misery in hell that 
transcend imagination, will not be denied. But on 
what principle is promotion given in heaven, and 
is there any hope in hell? 

Undoubtedly the record of the earthly life, to 
the date of death, is the basis of judgment at the 
beginning of the new career; but what kind of 
236 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


record have we to make as we begin again? And 
can a record be made in hell, which is of any value? 

The idea of hope, or repentance, leading to 
reform, in the perdition of the spiritual world, has 
not been favored by many intelligent students of 
divine revelation; for they have not found that this 
view is entertained in the Scriptures. They have, 
therefore, strongly objected to the theory of pro¬ 
bation in hell, and felt that such teaching was 
presumptuous; and there is reason for believing 
that it is. The Bible does not consider the pos¬ 
sibilities of the supernatural hell in this respect. 
The state is so different that revelation concerning 
this point could not be understood in this life. We 
are left, therefore, to form our own conclusions. 
It being clearly shown that there is an eternal hell 
which many have taken, despising a life of purity 
and righteousness on the other side. 

That there is declension in the spiritual hell is 
evident as we notice the satans and devils, or 
demons of the Bible, and study the records of their 
efforts and failures. 

It should be understood that hell is not neces¬ 
sarily a locality. It is a state, or condition, found 
in people, and when they are in that state they are 
237 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


in hell. The '‘infernal regions” have not been 
discovered. They have been indefinitely located and 
described by poets and mythological writers, who 
have had no authority for their geographical, or 
astronomical calculations. 

A devil is a portable inferno. He is a part of 
hell. He can be found wherever there is an oppor¬ 
tunity for him to act, or so long as he is capable 
of making an impression on those who are sus¬ 
ceptible to such influences. The time comes when 
he is incapable, but there is another to take his 
place as he subsides. 

The devil of Eden went down exhausted, wrecked 
by his own effort, and there is nothing to show 
that he ever again became prominent. It has been 
supposed that he was the Satan who tempted Job, 
and David, but this cannot be demonstrated. The 
weakness and permanent incapacity of the Serpent 
of Eden was clearly predicted . 1 

The failure of the Satan of the Gospels is noticed , 2 
as well as that of the Old Devil of the Apocalypse . 3 
In each case it is a complete collapse. So it was 
with the demons who withstood Christ, and the 
Apostles. In every instance they disappeared igno- 


1 Gen. iii. 14. 


Hohn xii. 31. 
238 


8 Rev. xx. 10. 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


miniously. They live and are dead. Wickedness 
brings weakness and decay. 

Modern spiritual satans and demons are around 
us, as well as heavenly angels, and the battle rages. 
But invisible spiritual fiends have their day and 
go down in contempt. The world is full of wicked¬ 
ness, but it improves. Hell settles to the bottom, 
but righteousness is in the ascendant. 

The heights of heaven never can be reached. 
There is something better than the best that has 
ever been known or imagined. Those who have 
gained the highest honors in the celestial state, 
and are unparalleled in wisdom and power, are 
looking for promotion. The tendency to cherish 
all that is worthy is so strong, and the possibilities 
are so great, that progress in heaven cannot be 
compared with the most wonderful development 
here. But decline in the immaterial perdition is 
so rapid that it can be illustrated only by swift 
destruction, and death. 

Suicide is the last resort of one who would bury 
himself in eternal forgetfulness, or find relief in 
change, whether for better or for worse. It is 
despair culminating in destruction. But life in 
that realm of unspeakable wretchedness is actuated 


239 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


by an intense opposition to all that is right—a 
desperate attempt to know, and feel the most abom¬ 
inable wickedness—to be the vilest of the vile. 
Hope is dead. Despair is a thing of the past. 
Language is not strong enough to express the con¬ 
suming ambition to ruin, and be ruined, which 
increases as its willing victims grow weaker, and 
sink lower in unfathomable decay. 

Hell is the Cloaca Maxima of the world, through 
which the sewage of the centuries finds its way 
to unknown depths. 

Thousands of intelligent people are drifting 
downward. They have begun to cherish evil ten¬ 
dencies, and cultivate them. They find a kind of 
satisfaction in dissipation. They begin moderately, 
but soon become very corrupt and are ready to do 
the worst things. They have acquired such a 
strong desire and taste for immoral practices that 
they are overwhelmed, and dominated by them. 
They seek the company of those who are like them¬ 
selves and plunge into excesses. They glory in the 
wreckage of character, and become more vicious and 
cruel in their lusts, until they are thoroughly 
depraved. 

Outwardly they may preserve the appearance of 
240 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


virtue, and their real characters may not be well 
known until we are startled with accounts of 
dreadful scandal in some shameful resort, in which 
murder and suicide are conspicuous. 

These things are common. Men of influence, 
with hopeful outlook, often go down in this way, 
fascinated by the allurements of vice, and not 
alarmed by its consequences. They become willing 
victims and destroy themselves, knowing the facts. 

The family circle, united by common interests 
and tender relations, is the bright center of earthly 
happiness. 

A bride wreathed with flowers stands holding 
the hand of the man to whom she gives her life 
forever. She listens to his pledge of undying love. 
The future is radiant with hope. Home is the 
sweet word that comes to her with thoughts of all 
that she can be to him. She will be true till death. 
Tears are seen in the eyes of the fond mother as 
the last words of the ceremony are pronounced 
and she steps forward to embrace the child of her 
love and care. How can she give her up, and 
feel that she is no longer responsible after so many 
years of watchfulness and loving interest? Quickly 
she wipes away the tears and hopes for the best 
241 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


as the merry company express their good wishes, 
and enter into the festivities of the hour. . . . 
Years of work and careful management bring 
prosperity. Children gather around the table pre¬ 
pared for them by loving hands. The wedding 
day lingers in the memory of one whose life has 
been refined by trial, and inspired by heaven. 

Trouble begins when confidence is disturbed. 
Suspicion darkens the home. Love fades slowly 
away. The wife’s secret rankles in her bosom. 
Oh, the bitter agony of grief! The cruel murder 
of the fond heart! Can floods of tears relieve its 
unutterable woe? 

Scandalous reports are confirmed. The husband 
is the victim of corrupt passion. Disgrace and 
humiliation blacken his fair name. lie seeks the 
company of the dissolute and reckless. He is 
avoided by respectable society. Business is neg¬ 
lected—property lost—family abandoned. . . . 

A dying man, once prosperous and happy, is 
found in a brothel of the city. Diseases engendered 
by lewdness and debauchery have destroyed his 
vital forces, and vitiated his mind. Darkness set¬ 
tles in upon him, followed by a period of uncon¬ 
sciousness. He is dead. He realizes the change 
242 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


soon after the burial. He finds himself in the gloom 
of the unearthly hell. His condition is deplorable, 
but it has been superinduced and created by himself. 
He cannot enjoy anything because everything in 
him has been perverted, and it reacts upon him 
in a way that is abnormal. He is the same man in 
his tendencies. He hates virtue and holy living, 
and is still interested in what is corrupt and im¬ 
moral. Physical death does not change the char¬ 
acter, but the mode of existence. 

He seeks gratification for his vile appetites and 
passions, as he did formerly, but cannot get a 
satisfactory response. He finds nothing that can 
serve his purposes, for he is in a spiritual state, 
and his environment is different, and he is not 
prepared for it. Finding this to be the fact, lie 
cultivates mental and imaginary vices and crimes, 
and by dwelling upon them and nourishing them, 
he becomes morally worse and is more desperate 
and damnable in his nature. Thus he is rapidly 
transformed and becomes an infernal, or spiritual, 
devil. 

He is still in the world, though not in the natural 
body, and seeks affinity in those who are susceptk 
ble to bad influences, and are willing to entertain 
243 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


evil thoughts, and may be willing to go further 
and cultivate the acquaintance of a spiritual col¬ 
league whose real character may not be known. 
Such a spirit may be active for a while entering 
into the mind of a person who has some object to 
gain by foul means, and co-operate by suggesting 
plans which seem quite plausible, and look as if 
they might be successful. 

Such is the history of a career once happily 
begun, and while it may seem incredible that such 
depths of degradation should be chosen by a human 
being, yet examples of abandoned wretches young 
in years can be found in the streets of our great 
cities at midnight, who were once virtuous and 
happy. They have become incorrigible. They 
detest reform, and will die as they have lived. 
There are people who glory in crime and filthiness, 
and will cherish depravity to the bitter end, regard¬ 
less of the cost. They are determined to ruin 
themselves, and do it eternally. 

The period of activity in a tempting devil cannot 
last always, for he is subject to a law of limitation 
which is in himself. He deteriorates rapidly, and 
finally becomes so ignorant and degraded that he 
is, practically, out of the way. There is nothing 
244 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


to sustain him, consequently he grows weaker and 
more obscure, and sinks at last into eternal 
death . 4 So far as his influence is concerned, he 
is a mere negation. He is isolated—wandering in 
darkness amid horrible apparitions, loathsome 
smells, mockery, curses, and obscenity. 

The depravity of those degraded beings who 
were once men and women of the natural world, 
can be noticed as we read the Gospels. Christ and 
His disciples had such keen spiritual discernment 
and discrimination, that they were able to discover 
many of them infesting humanity. These demons 
fiercely opposed the redeeming work they were 
doing. Not in a single instance did they show any 
evidences of repentance or reform. They furnish 
us with vivid illustrations of that hell which is 
everlasting. 

The desolation of the perishing multitudes in 
the world of the lost is beyond conception. All 
that is valuable to human beings is excluded by 
the degradation of the mind, and the moral dis¬ 
eases that rage with cancerous fire. Social distinc¬ 
tions are annihilated by the overwhelming desire 
to be unknown. There is no common bond of 
4 Ch. v., p. 7°. 

245 




LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


unity. Confidence is lacking and life is without 
incentives to effort of any kind that is worthy. 
There is nothing to do but suggest evil ideas, and 
make bad impressions on those who are willing 
to receive them. No change relieves the eternal 
monotony, but decay and deeper death. 

The corruption of the entire nature increases, 
festering and fomenting with infernal virus, while 
decline is constant. Perishing, yet imperishable; 
dying, yet never extinct, they exist, knowing that 
they are responsible for their condition, but deter¬ 
mined to remain in deadly hatred of all virtue and 
righteous living. 

The transition from the natural to the spiritual 
world, at death, is associated with mystery. To 
know just what the experience is would be impos¬ 
sible, even if we had a clear and definite statement 
from one who had passed through it, because people 
are so different. One instance, or a thousand, 
would not furnish reliable criteria by which to 
judge others. 

A brief period of unconsciousness may intervene. 
A number of persons were restored to natural life 
by divine power in the first century; but in no case 
do we learn that they expressed any knowledge of 
246 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


the other world gained by this change. They were, 
before restoration, said to be “asleep” in some 
instances, by which we do not understand simply 
physical death (for a distinction was made at that 
time), but profound mental repose, equivalent to 
temporary unconsciousness. Coming back to life 
then was the same as being awakened from sleep, 
as far as sensation and recollection were concerned, 
showing that the transition was very natural, and 
sometimes gradual . 5 But whether there is a gradual 
or sudden opening of the portals of the unseen 
world, it is certain that a realization of the fact is 
not long delayed. 

Samuel had been dead but a short time when he 
appeared to Saul in spiritual form. It seems that 
the period of repose, with him, was not complete, 
for he asked Saul why he had “disquieted” him . 6 
Nevertheless he was fully conscious of the great 
change through which he had passed, and his rela¬ 
tion to the earthly life. He was permitted, with 
divine approval, to administer a rebuke to Saul, 
and utter a clear and startling prediction that was 
fulfilled the next day. 

5 See Ch. viii. “Sleep” may also mean conscious heavenly 
rest. 

°I. Sam. xxviii. 15. 


247 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The souls “under the altar’’ who had suffered 
martyrdom did not wait long before getting their 
first promotion . 7 And another was before them 
which they would take when their brethren in the 
earthly state were also killed for the same reasons, 
and should appear in heaven. Therefore, they were 
to “rest for a little season” until they had met these 
friends, and then receive greater honors, for which 
they would be well prepared. From this it appears 
that there is a kind of heavenly evolution on the 
other side, and degrees of progress await the faith¬ 
ful, which are associated with conditions that must 
be fulfilled. 

The most intelligent angels, to whom important 
work is given, have made a record here, and another 
in heaven. They have been tested in many ways, 
and have developed ability that is uncommon, even 
in the celestial realms. This is evident as we see 
that people in heaven are graded and take higher 
rank as they exhibit a fitness for it, and a capacity 
to assume its responsibilities, and thus enjoy its 
privileges and opportunities. No invidious distinc¬ 
tions can be made and there is nothing in the clas- 


7 Rev. vi. 9-11. 
248 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


sification that is not satisfactory to all, because it 
is seen by all to be right and just. 

The “third heaven” mentioned by St. Paul 
should not be regarded as a domain, or place, 
located above the first and second heavens, trans¬ 
cending them in literal height above the earth . 8 
Nor should we imagine that “mansions” in heaven 
are buildings, or apartments of some kind, in 
which people live. 

Heaven is a “place,” but it cannot be located as 
we locate a place on the map of the globe. It is 
a place because it is associated with the earth. 
It belongs to it, and cannot be disconnected because 
it is the source from which its inhabitants are 
derived, and is a great field of effort for God and 
holy angels who are here, and constitute the spiritual 
heaven of our planet. 

We can locate heaven as we could locate the pop¬ 
ulation of the globe, if all were free to live where 
it would be most congenial to them considering 
their tastes, adaptation, employments, and pleasures, 
understanding that our world is the habitat of those 
originating here, and therefore would be preferred 
by them to a residence in any other part of the 


8 II. Cor. xii. 2. 
249 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


Universe, when the facts were known concerning 
the advantages of other spheres for those of our 
kind . 9 ' 

God’s “house” is His environment . 10 It is His 
sphere of action, and comprehends the entire Uni¬ 
verse. Every part of it is accessible to Him, for 
He produced it. It must, therefore, have been 
open to Him from the beginning. But we are 
human, and for this reason are limited to our sphere, 
which is the world. 

It may be possible for people in the spiritual state 
to visit distant orbs; but the desirability, or the 
expediency of it, is a matter of speculation. There 
are many reasons for believing that people in our 
heaven are abundantly satisfied with the ample 
provision that has been made for eternal existence 
in this part of the Universe. 

There are but few who do not think that this 
world is large enough. Territory is not so impor¬ 
tant. People, interesting people, in large numbers, 
make life attractive here, and so it will be in the 
future, for nobody dies in heaven, and its popula- 

9 Ch. v. Our world is the environment of spiritual as well 
as natural beings originating here. 

10 John xiv. 2. 


250 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 

tion has been increasing rapidly for many thousands 
of years. 

Our heaven will be more attractive to us than the 
heaven associated with any other world, because it 
is filled with our kind of people. Judging from 
what we know of conditions on other planets, 
natural life must be so very different from ours 
that we should find little or nothing of common 
interest in these strange worlds. If their natural 
environment is different, then their supernatural or 
incorporeal life would be correspondingly diverse . 11 

Mansions in God’s house cannot mean literal 
dwelling places, or abodes, for He does not occupy a 
house or anything that resembles one. Human life 
in heaven will be similar in some respects to that of 
the Divine Being, for we are then spiritual, and 
do not require the necessities and conveniences that 
are so important here. 

By a “mansion” or a “prepared place” a position , 
or an appointment, is understood, which involves 
a relation to God that is very desirable, because 
it will be suited to the ability and the taste of the 
one who receives it. 

The “third heaven” to which St. Paul referred 


11 See Ch. v. 

251 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


was not a “department” in the celestial world, but 
a revelation in vision of the privileges which he 
would enjoy on the other side, if faithful and true 
to his duty here. His work was very heavy and 
dangerous. He was bitterly attacked and perse¬ 
cuted by enemies, natural and spiritual, for years. 
This revelation, in which he actually saw and felt 
the glories of heaven as he would know them in 
the future, was given for his encouragement. He 
was inspired and made triumphant amid difficulties 
by the rapturous ecstasy of that sacred hour, which 
continued vivid in his memory and made him heroic. 

Social privileges in heaven surpass any that are 
known on earth. The interpretation of thought and 
feeling is open to all. Even the incipient idea, 
indistinct and nameless—the shadow of the unborn 
thought—hidden in the depths of the soul, can be 
perceived. What cannot be reached in words, in 
manner, in tones, or in any way that is known to 
us, is very clear to the celestial observer who has, 
in a degree, the divine faculty of knowing what is 
in others . 12 Spiritual perception and mental pene¬ 
tration are perfected in the heavenly angels. The 
power to exclude from the mind all that is objec- 


I. Cor. xiii. 12. 
252 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


tionable is equally great. So they can shut out all 
that is evil and become invulnerable to temptation, 
and be in heaven always, no matter where they 
are, in respect to locality. Their duties may take 
them into remote places, and they may have mes¬ 
sages for the good, as well as for the worst people, 
in both worlds. 

Transparent personality makes misunderstanding 
impossible. The wonders of love and intelligence 
rapidly unfolding, create surprise and delight. 
Mutual attraction is intensified by unlimited con¬ 
fidence and knowledge of intrinsic virtues, and 
loveliness exceeding the loftiest ideals of earth. 

The memory of brighter days is enchanting, of 
pleasures that were real, but fleeting, when, 

“Love took up the harp of Life, and smote on all the chords, 
with might; 

Smote the chord of self, that, trembling, passed in music, 
out of sight.” 13 

But the glamour that concealed weakness and 
defects and brought disappointment, will not deceive 
us in the spiritual paradise of the future. 

The mystic “tree of life” in the garden of moral 
purity was the symbol of greater honor and felicity 


18 Tennyson’s Locksley Hall. 
253 



LITE IN TWO WORLDS 


than had ever been known to mortals . 14 It implied 
a revelation of the divine nature to the progenitor 
of a new race, that placed him and his descendants 
so far above all others in privileges and distinc¬ 
tion that they were called “The Sons of God.” 
They were known as such among surrounding 
nations. This symbolic tree appears again in the 
vision of St. John, as he looks into the spiritual 
heaven, but it indicates so much more than could 
be obtained by the most favored people, in the 
earthly state, that it bears twelve kinds of fruit, 
which can be found every month in the year, and 
even its “leaves are for the healing of the nations /’ 15 
No emblem of life is conceivable that represents 
so much that is desirable and interesting to 
humanity. 

The tree of the knowledge of good and evil can 
still be found. Even an angel in heaven can listen 
to the voice of the tempter, and look at the fruit, 
and find that it is “pleasant to the eyes,” and cling 
to a fatal delusion, knowing it to be such, and fall 
into disgrace and wretchedness and spiritual pov¬ 
erty and moral nakedness; for angels have done 


14 Gen. ii. 


254 


Rev. xxii. 2. 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


such things. The knowledge of good and evil, 
mixed, is still the cause of many failures and crimes 
that curse the world. 

The fulfillment of conditions essential to success 
in heaven is very important. The idea that the 
candidate for future blessedness throws off all 
responsibility as he enters the other world, and has 
nothing before him but an eternal vacation, has 
been advanced by those who have not understood 
human nature, or the divine plan. There is rest 
in heaven, but everlasting rest would be monotonous 
and demoralizing. A king must work or neglect 
the affairs of his realm and lose the respect of his 
subjects. He has problems to study and questions 
to answer that require attention. Nature reveals 
the fact that God began to work millions of years 
ago, and that His efforts have been continuous and 
persistent. It is unreasonable to suppose that the 
administration of the affairs of the Universe does 
not involve careful and costly effort, even for Him. 
It is our privilege to co-operate with Him in His 
work, here and hereafter. 

Careful, patient, and earnest effort is necessary 
for our development on the other side. We shall 
never reach a state of perfection wherein it will 

255 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


be impossible for us to make mistakes. Infalli¬ 
bility is an attribute of God. 

The struggles and victories of earthly life are the 
most difficult and dangerous, because we work 
under great disadvantages. But there are battles 
to fight and victories to win in heaven. 16 

The ministry of angels in the natural world was 
a very important work for thousands of years. It 
is limited in these times by misunderstanding and 
unbelief. But the opportunity for it in the spiritual 
world is greater than ever before, because the 
foundation for effort of this kind has been laid in 
the general diffusion of knowledge here and in 
clearer light concerning human character and des¬ 
tiny. Therefore, there is a better opportunity to 
judge or instruct those who enter the other world 
in these times. And this work is accomplished 
through the interposition of angels. 

There are a great many irresponsible people enter¬ 
ing the other world every day. Suppose that the 
number of persons dying every twenty-four hours 
is 100,000. One-half of all who are born die in 
infancy or childhood. We should also consider 
that there are vast numbers, not only in semi- 


Jude 9 . 

256 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


civilized and barbarous countries, but in enlight¬ 
ened lands, who are as irresponsible as children. 
These multitudes are to be instructed, disciplined, 
and judged. 17 It may take a long time for some of 
them to reach the point of intelligent decision, 
because such decision cannot be made wisely and 
justly until they know what they are doing, and this 
fact is perfectly understood by those to whom the 
important work of examination is committed. 

A day of judgment is a day of decision. There 
is preparation for such days, not only here but 
hereafter. Such work is assigned to the most com¬ 
petent angels in heaven. They are responsible to 
the Divine Judge, with whom, and in whom, they 
act. 18 

When clear light and good opportunities have 
been afforded in the earthly life, and have been 
persistently refused or neglected, it is understood 


17 It is generally believed by the most intelligent Bible stu¬ 
dents that there is in the spiritual world an intermediate state. 
But they do not understand that those who reach perdition 
are again on probation. There are thousands in the hells of 
this life who despise probation, and there are reasons for 
believing that some never want it hereafter. Matt. xxv. 46. 
Rev. xx. 10. 

18 Matt. xiii. 39. Mark xiii. 27. I. Cor. vi. 2-3. 

257 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


that a decision has been made. When a man has 
a chance to make a good investment, and is con¬ 
vinced that it will pay well, and is perfectly safe, 
and he refuses, or neglects it, it is seen that he did 
not want to invest. Such a person finds, without 
doubt, that he is lost, as he enters the spiritual 
world, and realizes what he had previously under¬ 
stood; that his misfortune was his choice. On the 
other hand, a decision, though it come late, if it 
is thoroughly tested and found to be genuine, gives 
a clear title to an immediate entrance into the 
celestial paradise. 19 

There are many errors to be corrected in the 
other world, and much teaching is necessary. Very 
intelligent and progressive people in heaven find 
those who know more than they do, and are capable 
of helping them. Angelic ministry is a work of 
instruction and inspiration and revelation. It is the 
expression of the divine mind. In union with 
glorified humanity God finds satisfaction and is able 
to execute His plans. 

Employment of many kinds is essential to our 
interests here. The populous centers of trade, the 
homes of mighty commerce, where the emblems of 


18 Luke xxiii. 43. 
258 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


many nations remind us of the world’s ambition 
and success, crowded streets, and magnificent build¬ 
ings, towering high, where the products of all 
climes in rich profusion invite our inspection, speak 
of labor with brain and hands in colossal manufac- 
factories, in thousands of homes, in the fields and 
forests, and mines of the earth. The diversity of 
occupations, and the marvels of inventive genius, 
with the revelations of science and art, open hidden 
treasures and indicate the ever-expanding possibili¬ 
ties of this brief life, as it builds on foundations laid 
in the past, and seizes the opportunities of the 
present. 

Life in heaven may not seem to us so real and 
interesting, because many of the pursuits that have 
stimulated our ambitions here will be no longer 
necessary or possible. Here we work for the 
necessities and comforts of life. We must have 
food, clothing, shelter, and many things that are 
desirable but not absolutely essential, that we may 
compare favorably in our manner of living with 
those around us, whose opinions we respect. But 
when an ample fortune has been secured, and labor 
of any kind is not required for the support or needs 
of those who may be depending upon him, a man 
259 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


may continue in business for its own sake, or 
because the force of habit holds him to his work, 
or he has ambition to accumulate, without definite 
reasons. 

If, however, he is sensible and normal in his 
tastes and hopes, he will look for satisfaction in 
other things. He has leisure and is independent. 
He may want to travel and see the world. He 
will not be indifferent to society and recreation. 
Honor and position among men of his class will 
not be overlooked. He will pursue his favorite 
studies and find literature that is interesting. He 
may seek seclusion and rest and lead a quiet life. 
He will follow his inclinations, but he can have no 
concern about the necessities and comforts of life, 
for effort in this respect is useless. 

This illustrates the outlook for a man who enters 
the other world and is heavenly in his aspirations. 
He has an opportunity to see, to know, and do what 
is new and intensely interesting to him. He is 
strong and hopeful, and feels that he cannot die 
again. He is very ambitious, for he is full of 
divine energy and heavenly enthusiasm. He is 
anxious to do well and will accept suggestions 
concerning his duties and privileges, and find that 
260 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


they are in harmony with his views and capacity. 
He finds that effort in this new field will pay richly. 
He is rewarded by discoveries very interesting and 
important. 

Heaven is a new world to the beginner, and he 
may spend much time in exploring it before he 
is assigned to any very important and responsible 
duty. A period of rest and reflection may also be 
a time for observation, study and preparation for 
special duties. This is clearly and gladly under¬ 
stood, for people in heaven are very anxious to 
promote the interests of the Kingdom, and do the 
will of the King. 

Work in heaven does not involve physical effort. 
Physical exertion is associated with natural life. 
The power of mind over matter is very great. It 
is not necessarily enshrined in physical form. This 
fact is illustrated in the creation which is the result 
j of effort by a spiritual being, capable of controlling 
and utilizing forces of all kinds. There is, there¬ 
fore, a variety of exertion for heavenly angels, 
which they can use easily in any way that is desira¬ 
ble. The stone that closed the entrance to 
Joseph’s tomb, where the body of Christ had lain, 
“was very great,” but it was easily rolled back 
261 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


by an angel. No physical effort was made. The 
stone was moved by suggestion. 

Amusement is in harmony with the laws of our 
being and finds expression in relief from care, and 
whatever diverts the attention in pleasant ways. 
Recreation and change dispel the monotony that 
would wear away our lives. It brings new hopes, 
stimulating and refreshing the mind. New scenes 
leave permanent impressions and hang pictures in 
the galleries of the soul that memory may cherish. 
Books feed us with ideas, affording riches of 
knowledge for future use. 

Diversion is as necessary in heaven as it is here. 
The youthfulness and vivacity of its people find 
expression in every variety of entertainment and 
pursuit adapted to taste, temperament and nation¬ 
ality. 

Wit and humor cannot be repressed, because 
it is a holy state. These things are in the con¬ 
stitution of the mind, and are divinely implanted. 
Congenial society and the festivities of the celestial 
paradise promote good feeling. 20 

Amusements and diversions become evil to us 
when they are demoralizing in any respect. If 


20 Matt. xxv. io. 
262 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


there is a tendency to excess or dissipation, if the 
mind is preoccupied, and the interest so deep in 
these things as to interfere with success in the 
important work of life, and the development of the 
noblest and holiest character, there is something 
wrong. Nothing that can corrupt the affections or 
interfere with divine communion in the slightest 
degree is tolerated in heaven. 

The mixing of good and bad in amusements in 
such a way as to attract multitudes has become a 
gigantic evil here. It will curse the world so long 
as those who are in the business find it profitable. 
The time has come for a change. There is a 
demand for amusements and diversions of the right 
kind among the most thoughtful and heavenly- 
minded people. They want something that is in 
harmony with their tastes and aspirations, and 
when it is presented, and they have reason to 
believe that they are not going to be deceived, it 
will be gladly welcomed. The churches will then 
find their true sphere of activity, and will no longer 
attempt to supply the needs of their members with 
cheap and questionable attractions not appropriate 
in such places. 

There is now an opportunity for a syndicate of 
263 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


devout and judicious men to inaugurate a new era. 
They could redeem music and the drama, and 
present attractions of many kinds that would find 
favor with vast numbers of the most intelligent 
and conscientious people. 

Literature, art, invention, discovery, and all that 
is interesting and right find opportunity in heaven. 

The records of this world are not closed to the 
angels. They have access to our literature and are 
well acquainted with the affairs of our times. 
Their advantages are greater than ours in this 
respect, for they can know what is in the minds 
of those who write. This is necessary, for they 
have a work in the natural world and must be well 
acquainted with its affairs. This work is con¬ 
nected with their ministry on the other side. They 
study people here that they may know how to deal 
with them hereafter, for they execute the will of 
God by acting with him in His administration. 

The literature of heaven is very voluminous. 21 
It includes the records of all ages and nations. 
There is nothing fragmentary that cannot be made 
complete by investigation. What has transpired is 
carefully reviewed and considered. The study of 


21 Rev. xx. 12. 
264 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


life and character is essential that everything may 
be wisely and justly settled. 

Much of our literature is worth but little in 
heaven, because theirs is so much better. Some 
of it will do for reference, or evidence, for a man 
is judged by his works; but in general it is defec¬ 
tive and juvenile, when compared with the advanced 
thought of angels. The ideal characters in poetry 
and romance are superseded by those who are real 
and far more interesting. 

The curricula of our universities furnish lists of 
studies that are called fundamental and important, 
but the able men who hold responsible positions as 
instructors in these institutions find, in many 
instances, that they stand on platforms that have 
weak planks in them, and they are liable at any 
time to break and let them down. Especially is 
this true of theology . When the learned professor 
comes to the elucidation of a mystery which is 
beyond his depth, he may seek refuge in quotations 
and refer to eminent authorities, and, at last, cau¬ 
tiously state that his own view is similar to that 
of one of the writers he has mentioned. He may 
feel that this is the best he can do, and that it is 
safe for him, for should it be found that he had 
265 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


made a mistake, then it is seen that another eminent 
commentator has also failed. 

If the Bible is divinely inspired it is reliable, and 
can be understood and found to be right and con¬ 
sistent with itself. Understanding this to be true, 
our difficulties must frequently arise from inability 
to interpret its mysteries. 

When there seems to be no key, let the Divine 
Interpreter be recognized, and wait until something 
is suggested by Him. When this is clearly under¬ 
stood, and those who are studying together are 
satisfied with this method, and are willing to test 
it by waiting until a satisfactory response comes, 
they will not be disappointed. 22 For this is the 
divine plan, and was understood and carefully 
observed by those who wrote the Scriptures, or 
acted as prophets and inspired teachers, whose 
works have been accepted by the whole Christian 
world, and found to be worthy and genuine. 

This is a practical way, because scholarship, 
ability, and judicious effort are not ignored; or 
the literature of the subject necessarily overlooked. 
Nor is time wasted, for attention can be given to 

22 Care should be used that all the conditions may be ob¬ 
served. 


266 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 

what is clear and easily understood wdiile waiting 
hopefully for light upon points that are confessedly 
very obscure and upon which there has been a wide 
difference of opinion for many years, and about 
which no conclusions have been reached that are 
generally acceptable and are seen to be right by 
competent judges. 23 

There are many such mysteries in the Bible. 
Former explanations are becoming more objection¬ 
able, for we are becoming more intelligent and 
practical, and cannot be satisfied with what seems 
unreasonable and unjust; or with what appears to 
be incredible on the face of it. Hence, the revo¬ 
lutionary tendencies in theological seminaries, and 
in fact everywhere. 

When the Bible is interpreted as it should be, 
and the few 7 clerical errors and interpolations that 
have crept in in the course of the centuries are 
eliminated, it will be found to be right in every 
way by those who want to know the truth. 

Art is cultivated in the heavenly state, and finds 
expression in ways that are far more interesting 
than ours. Our great difficulty here is with ma- 


23 Different views of the same truth may come, but essen¬ 
tial agreement is possible. 

267 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


terials. This is being overcome, but it never can 
be entirely removed. We deal with paint and 
stone and canvas, and many other things that mar 
our conceptions. Aesthetic people at the theatre do 
not like to consider what is going on behind the 
scenes, and what the stage carpenter and painter 
have done to make the play effective. 

While a celebrated scene was being presented in 
a New York theatre, representing a chariot race, 
one of the characters was seen kicking at a bolt 
that held a wheel in position. He was trying to 
produce an accident at the right instant. The dis¬ 
covery of his effort marred the effect when the 
chariot broke down. 

Pictures, statuary, and figures of all kinds, rep¬ 
resenting persons and animals, may seem quite real 
and life-like, and yet it is easy to notice that they 
are not, even if they are made to speak or act; there 
is something mechanical or artificial about them 
that can be readily discerned. It is not so in 
heavenly art. 

St. John, describing a scene in the Apocalypse, 
says: “And there appeared a great wonder in 
heaven; a woman clothed with the sun, and the 
moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown 
268 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


of twelve stars.” 24 This woman cried. She fled 
into the wilderness, and finally assumed wings and 
disappeared. She was able to represent what did 
not really occur: for a child was born to her, and 
children are not born in heaven. The twelve stars 
were not genuine, for planets, or suns, could not 
be brought together so as to form a crown for a 
woman. Neither was she literally clothed with the 
sun, but appeared to be, because of the brightness 
of her garments. Nor is it easy to believe that she 
was actually standing on the moon, whose mean 
distance from the Isle of Patmos is about 239,000 
miles. 

There are reasons for believing that this scene 
was produced for the occasion by a spiritual agency. 
And, yet, it was so realistic that John describes it 
as he would an object in the natural world. He 
understood, however, that these things were illus¬ 
trations of important truth. 

His vision of the heavenly Jerusalem, the river 
of life, and the trees that grew on either side of 
it, were shown to him by an angel. 25 This angel 
stated that he had been sent to do this work. 
John was so deeply impressed by the effort of this 


34 Rev. xii. 


269 


Rev. xxi. 9. 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


spiritual messenger, and his marvelous ability to 
present such views, that he tried to worship him. 
To this he objected, stating that he was his “Fel¬ 
low-servant,'” and was formerly among the prophets 
of his own nation. These words clearly reveal his 
human origin, for he was not, at that time, a prophet* 
but an angel with a message for a prophet . 26 And 
he was not, at that time, among those who would 
keep the sayings of John’s book, for these “sayings” 
were designed for people in the natural world, and 
were to be sent to the seven churches in Asia, for 
their warning and instruction and edification. 

Discovery and invention are often related to one 
another like cause and effect. Steam would never 
have been harnessed to an engine if some one had 
not discovered its power and availability for this 
purpose. Electricity would not have become prom¬ 
inent as a great wonder in the world, and a potential 
factor in modern civilization, if some one had not 
studied it carefully, and tried many experiments 
that involved danger and severe mental exertion. 

The study of natural forces and their availability 
for important purposes is a divine occupation. It 
is essential in cosmogony, for even fhe Deity could 

26 Rev. xxii. 6-9. See Ch. vi., p. 77. 

270 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


not make something out of nothing. And those 
who suppose that He did are not sustained by the 
Hebrew record of the Creation. The Hebrew verb 
“bara” signifies the new production of a thing. It 
does not necessarily imply that there was nothing 
from which it could be produced. Delitzsch says: 
(Commentar fiber die, Genesis, p. 91) “The word 
Bara, in its etymology, does not exclude a previous 
material. It has, as the use of ‘Piel’ shows, the 
fundamental idea of cutting or hewing. But, as 
in other languages, words which define creation, 
have the same etymological idea at their root, so 
‘Bara’ has acquired the idiomatic meaning of a 
divine creating, which, whether in the kingdom of 
nature, or of history, or of the spirit, calls into 
being that which hitherto had no existence. ‘Bara’ 
never appears as the word for human creations, 
differing in this from the synonyms ‘asak,’ ‘yat- 
zar/ ‘yalad,’ which are used both of man and of 
God; it is never used with an accusative of the 
material, and even from this it follows that it defines 
the divine creative act as one without limitations, 
and in its results, as to its proper material, entirely 
new, and as to its first cause, entirely the creation 
of divine power.” 


271 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The meaning which a word has acquired should 
be carefully distinguished from that which it meant 
when used thousands of years ago. Bara was not 
used as the word for human creations, because 
divine creation is something very different from 
human creation, and, therefore, a different word 
should be used. If this word was not used with 
the “accusative of the material” it does not neces¬ 
sarily follow that no original matter could be found 
in the Universe from which celestial bodies of many 
kinds could be formed. As the word “bara” in 
its etymology does not exclude a previous material, 
there is no reason why the idea that such material 
was not used should be entertained. 27 

The building of the Universe has occupied a very 
long period, because time is valuable to God as 
well as to man, when a great work is to be done. 
It does not yet appear what it will be, for it is still 
young, comparatively speaking. 

The progress of the world, so far as the human 
part of it is concerned, has been very slow. The 
advantages we enjoy in this age are the result of 
persistent and continuous effort, sustained for many 


See Ch. i. } p. 6. 
272 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


thousands of years. If men had always begun 
where their predecessors began, we should still live 
in the primeval wilderness, using stone hatchets, 
and covering ourselves with skins of animals. 

The gain in a century is very small when com¬ 
pared with what has been accomplished in the entire 
past; but there are exceptions among progressive 
and enterprising nations. More was done for the 
world in proportion to the time occupied in the 
nineteenth century than in any age since men have 
appeared on earth. Careful preparation had been 
made for it, and it became a culminating period. 

The invention of the telegraph prepared the way 
for greater things. Cyrus W. Field was ready to 
begin where Professor Morse stopped. His plan 
for a cable under the Atlantic, to Europe, was a 
bold scheme which seemed impracticable, if not 
impossible, to the most thoughtful men. In him 
there was genius coupled with an indomitable pur¬ 
pose that would not suffer defeat. 

Pie was known as a shrewd financier, and a man 
of science, with excellent judgment and a capacity 
for leadership. He put his own resources into the 
enterprise and thirteen years of severe mental and 
physical work. Pie accompanied dangerous expe- 

273 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


ditions, crossing the ocean more than forty times. 
Failure after failure occurred. Years passed, and 
public faith in the undertaking was shaken. There 
was difficulty in obtaining capital. In the eleventh 
year Mr. Field was still undismayed, after many 
losses and trials. The work began again with the 
Great Eastern, which was then the largest steam¬ 
ship in the world. One thousand two hundred 
miles of cable were laid, when suddenly, in mid¬ 
ocean, it parted, and the mighty ship steamed away 
with its disappointed company to the European 
shore. 

Not until the next year (1866), on the 27th of 
July, did the hour of triumph come. Instantaneous 
communication was then established between the 
Old and New Worlds. This was a very great 
achievement, for it meant, in the near future, 
instantaneous communication with all parts of the 
habitable globe, and in many respects the annihila¬ 
tion of time and space. 

Discovery and invention are as important in the 
future life as they are here. The desire for knowl¬ 
edge and power is very conspicuous in redeemed 
humanity. All things that are worthy are open to 
them for investigation and experiment; not only 
274 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


because of the gratification afforded, but for their 
practical utility. 

Progress in the celestial spheres is associated 
with intelligent effort of many kinds. And those 
who show the greatest determination and wisdom 
in their methods win the prizes. 

Effort is not confined to the study and contem¬ 
plation of the divine nature, although this is more 
wonderful and interesting than anything else to 
heavenly people. Their interest in one another is 
very deep and tender. Companionship with con¬ 
genial people of all ages takes much of their atten¬ 
tion, but this is not first in their thoughts. They 
have found that the greatest study of mankind is 
God. There are many things to know about Him 
that they have not understood. 

Some have been perplexed by the conflicting 
views of those upon whom they depended for lead¬ 
ership in this life. They find that the most 
eminent theologians have suffered more than others 
in attempting to define their creeds and make them 
acceptable to the world. At last, in heaven, they 
have discovered the cause of failure in the past, 
and now learn with satisfaction and success new 
things every day concerning Deity. But they also 
275 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


find that the most advanced angels have not learned 
all there is to know, and will confess that they are 
beginners, and that there is enough to occupy their 
attention forever; and that their interest constantly 
increases as they look into these glorious mysteries. 

Questions about the Divine Trinity, the person 
of Christ, and the Holy Spirit have been a source 
of confusion in Christendom for more than a 
thousand years. 

It is not well for us to believe that a council of 
men, however great and learned, could solve the 
problems that gather around this theme, and effec¬ 
tually settle all debates that might arise concerning 
it in the future. 

The light that we ought to have has not come 
yet, because there has been too much dependence 
upon the work accomplished by the councils and 
propagandas of ancient times. There has been a 
tendency to glorify the eminent religious teachers 
who lived a few centuries after the Christian era, 
and to magnify their work unduly. We may sup¬ 
pose that they had access to information that we 
cannot now obtain, and were more capable of 
knowing the truth than ourselves. And hence, we 
have had so much respect for their opinions. But 
276 


DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


their methods of dealing with heresy and estab¬ 
lishing doctrines would be considered crude and 
even barbarous in these days. 

The Fathers were more dogmatic and narrow in 
their views than the ripe scholars of to-day, and 
were sometimes very bitter in their prejudices. 
They did not always look for clearer light, but 
clung to their opinions on the Scriptures as tena¬ 
ciously as we do. Therefore, their views should be 
taken for what they are worth, and we should be 
open to all the light that can come to us, irrespective 
of their creeds, upon which much of the theology 
of the day is built. There are many things in 
Patristic literature that are valuable and cannot die; 
but our veneration for them should not close our 
eyes to present opportunities. 

The existence of Christ before His birth at 
Bethlehem has been regarded as an important fact, 
and there is evidence of a very positive kind which 
refers to it. But it would be difficult to show that 
he existed as a person previous to that time. It is 
more reasonable to believe that he was personified . 

He is called the “^oyof” which means the 
“Word” or “Speech” when reference is made to 
him before the incarnation. It should be noticed 
2 77 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


that He was not known as the Son of God until 
after He was born of Mary. Although in speak¬ 
ing of Himself, He says: “Before Abraham was I 
am.” 28 He alludes to the “glory which he had 
with the Father before the world was.” 29 He was 
the Maker of worlds, but not as the Son; but the 
Word. 30 The prophetic statement concerning Him 
as the Son “begotten this day” refers to His resur¬ 
rection only. This fact is noticed by St. Paul. 31 

Predictions that refer to Him as “the Son” or 
“a Son” should not be so interpreted as to make 
it appear that He was a Son at the time when 
these predictions were made. They anticipate the 
future, and were fulfilled after His birth in Judea. 
The impropriety of regarding Him as the Son of 
God previous to His birth is evident, as we con¬ 
sider these facts. 

As the Word He was in the divine Father, and 
“was God”; but when He was born He became the 
Son of God, and the Son of man. As the Word 
He is noticed in John’s Gospel, and was regarded 
by Himself as such when He alluded to His exist- 


18 John viii. 58. 30 John i. 3. 

”John xvii. 5. 31 Ps. 2, and Acts xiii. 33. 


278 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


ence before the time of Abraham, and His glory 
with the Father before the world was . 32 

The fact that He was in the Father as the 
“Word” was understood by Him, and that the 
Word became incarnate at the time of His con¬ 
ception and birth . 33 

He, therefore, inherited the “word” or “speech” 
from His Father, and it was in Him after He be¬ 
came a man, a very conspicuous characteristic; for no 
human being ever had such power to teach or express 
himself. This was noticed even by His enemies. 

As the Word He came “down from heaven,” 
became a divine man, and then was “sent” into the 
world with a redeeming work to do. When this 
was accomplished He returned to the fellowship of 
the Father in the spiritual state as a divine, but 


82 John xvii. 5, and John viii. 58. 

“There are reasons for believing that the language Christ 
used in speaking of what he was before his birth will not bear 
a literal interpretation, but that he spoke of his divine origin 
in figurative and spiritual terms, to impress his hearers with 
the fact that he was not simply a man of our world, but a 
divine human being. And was in his Father, as a child was 
in the nature of its father, before it came into the world. 
This gives us a more reasonable conception ot the “Logos,” 
or what is known as the “pre-natal Christ.” Hence we have 
the expression, “being in the form (nature) of God.”— 
Phil. ii. 6. 


279 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


human, person, and is known in heaven as the 
spiritual King of our world. 

To identify the Father with the Son in such a 
way as to make them one in the sense of being the 
same person is a great mistake. The relation of 
a father to his son is such that it is impossible to 
make them one and the same individual. But this 
has been attempted by sincere and intelligent people, 
who have thought that it solved a difficult problem 
and enabled them to see that there is only one God; 
for they could not see how there are two, when 
the Bible positively affirms that there is but one. 

The word God 34 may imply one, or more than 
one ; for, like the word man, it can be used in the 
plural as well as in the singular, but it stands always 
for the same kind, or order, of beings. 

That God, the Father, was in Christ is certain. 
For He acted in Him, and with Him, and through 
Him, in a way so remarkable that as the Son He 
represented His Father so well that He could justly 
say of Himself: "He that hath seen me, hath seen 
the Father.” 34 But it is preposterous to suppose 
that He identified Himself with His own Father, 
whom He came to represent. 


* 4 John xiv. 9. 34 In Hebrew sometimes Elohim. 
280 



DEPTHS AND PIEIGHTS 


Isaiah, in predicting the birth of Christ, speaks 
of the names by which He should be known. He 
says that “His name shall be called Wonderful, 
Counsellor, The Mighty God, the everlasting Father, 
the Prince of Peace.” 35 The prophet does not, in 
this passage, identify Him with the Father, but 
simply notices the fact that He would become the 
spiritual Father, or Shepherd, of His people . 36 

It is astonishing that such an error as this should 
find lodgment in the thought of philosophical 
people; and yet, to many, it has seemed very plaus¬ 
ible, but it is exceedingly inconsistent; for if this 
is true, Christ prayed to Himself, understanding 
that He was His own Father. An attempt has 
been made to explain this by stating that His 
“humanity” was, at that time, praying to His 
“divinity”; or, that His “animus” was addressing 
His “inmost soul,” or “anima .” 37 

85 Is. ix. 6. 

36 The witness of the Father, or his testimony concerning 
his son, is as important as the witness of the Spirit. At the 
time of Christ’s baptism the Father introduced him to the 
world as his Son, with whom he was “well pleased.” Those 
who teach that the Father and his Son are one in the sense 
of being the same person would make the Father introduce 
himself and state that he was well pleased with himself.— 
Mark i. n. 

87 “New Church Theology.” Rev. J. H. Smithson, p. 8i. 

87 Christ should not be regarded as his own Father. God 
281 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


If there is anything that hinders God’s work in 
the world, and about which He is sensitive, it is 
misunderstanding or misconception relating to 
Himself. Christ does not want any confusion in 
the minds of His people concerning His relations 
to His Father, because His love for the Father is 
very great. He would have us understand that His 
redeeming work is in our world, for he was born 
here and is a man of our kind. But His Father’s 
work has to do with all worlds, and the entire 
Universe. 


the Father was manifested in him and by him. Nevertheless 
the personality of the Son cannot be ignored. The Son is 
equal with the Father in this sense: He is a divine being, 
but he is dependent upon the Father because he is his Son. He 
prayed to the Father in the “days of his flesh,” and still offers 
prayer to him and always will: “Seeing he ever liveth to make 
intercession.”—Heb. vii. 25; Rom. viii. 34. But the Father 
never prays. There is no one to whom he could offer a pe¬ 
tition. Christ is the “first-born of every creature”; but this 
does not mean that he was born in the spiritual world in the 
remote or indefinite past. If this were true, he would still be 
the Son and necessarily younger than his Father. The phrase, 
“born from everlasting” is vague and unintelligible. As the 
Word he was in the Father always. The expression, “first¬ 
born of every creature,” is figurative and defines his rank and 
precedence as God’s only Son. As such he is the “first and 
the last.” He began at Bethlehem as a divine-human child, 
not as a mature being in a child’s life and form; for he grew 
in wisdom as well as in stature. 


282 



DEPTHS AND HEIGHTS 


The Spirit is “grieved” when He is regarded as 
an “influence” or a “manifestation” rather than a 
divine person; for He is the “Spirit of Truth,” and 
can work with greater freedom and success when 
the facts concerning Himself are understood . 38 

He reveals Christ and the Father, and is for this 
world. His work was in nature at the time of 
the Creation. He is like us, yet divine, and we 
are like Him; for God said: “Let us make man in 
our own image, after our likeness.” He is noticed 
in the beginning as one who acted in God the 
Father, and for Him: “And the Spirit of God 
moved upon the face of the waters, and God said 
let there be light.” 39 

The union of the Father with the Son and the 
Holy Spirit is not more mysterious than many 
truths of the Bible. These three are God, and each 
is God. The Father ordains, the Son redeems, ami 
the Spirit acts in them and for us. He prays in 
us making intercession; but He is the “Promise 

38 To sin against the Holy Spirit is to sin against a person, 
not a “manifestation” or an “attribute.” We may be in danger 
of committing this sin. We should carefully avoid misunder¬ 
standing and conscious or unconscious misrepresentation. 
Christ noticed the difference between himself and the Spirit 
when he referred to this sin.—Matt. xii. 32. 

88 Gen. i. 


283 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


of the Father” sent in answer to the Saviour’s 
prayer. 

That which is most wonderful in God is His 
comprehension. 

His environment is the Universe; and His gen¬ 
eral knowledge and control of the whole is connected 
with a grasp of the most minute details that is 
absolutely overwhelming for us to contemplate. 

Some think that the Universe is unlimited, and 
undoubtedly it is in one respect, for it has no definite 
boundaries. Space is indefinite and infinite in its 
extent; but the numerous creations within it occupy 
but little territory when compared with that which 
is available. There is, therefore, an opportunity 
for God to extend His dominions, which is com¬ 
mensurate with His power and wisdom, and ever 
will be. 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA AND THE OTHER 
WORLD 


Spiritualism attracts the attention of millions. 
To some it is amusing; others are alarmed, and 
not a few who are susceptible to psychic influences 
find in it gratification for their love of the mar¬ 
velous, and sincerely believe that it enables* them 
to demonstrate immortality. 

Whatever it may be, it is not a recent discovery 
or revelation, although it has been known as 
“spiritualism” for a comparatively short time. 
Astrologers and magicians were common in ancient 
times, and had greater ability to open what seemed 
to be the other world to those who consulted them 
than any “medium” of this age. They controlled 
empires and moved armies by oracular predictions. 
The belief that they were inspired by invisible 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


beings, and were familiar with the dead, was illus¬ 
trated by phenomena, apparently miraculous. 

Spiritualism was the religious belief of many 
civilized nations. It is something that can adapt 
itself to any age, and to any people, irrespective 
of their morals or intelligence. It seems to cater 
to the tastes, tendencies, and peculiarities of those 
who favor it. It is one of the most accommodating 
beliefs known to the world. It flourished in myth¬ 
ological times. The gods, as “spirits,” were very 
responsive, but not always reliable, and often 
notorious for their vices. 

People who are sincere, not very suspicious, and 
have the right “medium” can notice manifestations, 
and get responses to inquiries that do not interfere 
with their religious convictions, and in fact seem 
to favor them. The same “medium” can entertain 
others who have no principles that are worthy, and 
furnish them with something that is in harmony 
with their views. 

The “medium” is not restricted in his vocation. 
He can be “all things to all men.” If the conditions 
are unfavorable, and he is unable in some instances 
to produce the results anticipated by his audience, 
he can substitute something fraudulent, or spurious, 
286 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


hoping that it will not be detected; and the “spirits*’ 
will not condemn his methods. They will still 
cling to him in his perplexity. Even “good 
spirits” 1 can be induced to work and furnish 
“communications” in spite of these questionable 
expedients. The unscrupulous “medium” need not 
feel that his mixed motives are against him, if only 
he can conceal the facts; for he can depend upon the 
“spirits,” no matter what he may be, if the psychic 
environment is suitable. 

After making ample allowance for fraud, leger¬ 
demain, unconscious cerebration, imperceptible mus¬ 
cular action, and various optical illusions, and 
mental delusions that are sometimes associated with 
the efforts of those who are called “mediums,” it 
is evident, to the careful observer, that a force 
apparently more or less intelligent and different 
from other known forces acts and seems to have 
personality and human characteristics. 

There are forces in nature such as growth, or 
electricity, that exhibit wonderful power. They 
are governed by laws from which there is not much 
deviation, and conditions, that are quite well known. 
But when mind or personality is found, apparently 


1 So-called. 
287 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


of a supernatural kind, and having a strange power 
which seems to come from the other world, there 
is something deeply interesting to the psychologist. 

There are many who believe that God can and 
does reveal Himself in response to prayer. To 
them such revelations are often so clear and satis¬ 
factory that they amount to actual demonstration. 
But they know that they cannot have these mani¬ 
festations of divine approval, unless they are sincere 
and right, at least, according to their own judgment 
of themselves. Such conditions are not essential 
to the success of a spiritual seance. The “medium” 
can act in almost every instance, if there is some 
confidence in him, and a degree of respect for the 
“spirits” he may introduce. 

L T nder such circumstances it would be very diffi¬ 
cult for a “spirit” to simulate God, or claim to be 
Christ, or the Holy Spirit. If he should say or do 
anything that was not appropriate in a divine Being, 
he could not sustain himself. And if intelligent 
believers in Deity should look for evidences of 
divine approval and favor in the average seance, 
they would not be satisfied; for such methods of 
communication and manifestation would not be in 
harmony with credible revelation concerning the 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


divine character and work, or the ministry of 
angels. 

There are those who are not unwilling to abandon 
themselves without much reserve to whatever may 
come from an unearthly source. Mixed in their 
motives and curious, they are attracted by spirit¬ 
ualism. This class is large. They are not very 
anxious to investigate carefully. They want to find 
something strange and supernatural. They go, and 
look, and listen, and believe. They are surprised, 
for they find “something.” They are startled, and 
sometimes infatuated, and eagerly look for more, 
not knowing what may happen. 

Heavy pieces of furniture are moved by a power 
that seems to be superhuman. Messages from 
those who claim to be deceased friends, or rela¬ 
tives, come written in mysterious and apparently 
miraculous ways, and sometimes in languages 
unknown to any one present. Remarkable appear¬ 
ances and unaccountable sounds are noticed. 

These things are bewildering and astonishing to 
many, for they can see no reason why the phe¬ 
nomena, at least, are not genuine. 

Sometimes a “medium” who is a friend and has 
been known for years, in whom a family has con- 
289 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


fidence, is invited to come into a home, and entertain 
a select company in the evening. Remarkable man¬ 
ifestations occur. All are convinced that there Is 
something in spiritualism. Many experiments are 
tried, and the interest increases; but they find much 
about it that is unreliable and unsatisfactory. 
Thoughtful ones may feel that it is dangerous and 
misleading, and should be banished from the home ; 
but they will concede that it is a great mystery, 
very fascinating, and stimulating to the curiosity. 

When invited to try their ability and see what 
they can do, some will consent, admitting that they 
know nothing about spiritualism, and that it is their 
first effort of the kind. They fail. Others are 
surprised to find that they have “mediumistic 
power.” Furniture will move when lightly touched, 
and express intelligence. Planchette, or the “Talk¬ 
ing Board,” is very responsive, and will answer 
inquiries. “Spirit Writing” is tried. The hand of 
the new medium is “under control,” and moves 
mysteriously. The company is interested in a 
“communication,” apparently from the spiritual 
world, for it is signed with the name of a deceased 
person, who is known to some one present. 

Spiritualism created great excitement in Western 
290 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


New York, about the middle of the nineteenth cen¬ 
tury. It seemed to be something new. It spread 
rapidly, and in a few years reached nearly every 
part of the civilized world. Within the past few 
years it has been associated to a greater extent 
with psychic phenomena of many kinds, such as 
hypnotism, clairvoyance, mental healing, and many 
psychological and scientific problems. 

A flood of light has been thrown upon psychic 
phenomena, but “spiritualism” so-called is still 
a dark mystery to many. Men of acknowledged 
ability in the scientific world have attempted to 
fathom its depths, and analyze its sources, but they 
have not accomplished much in proportion to the 
effort made. 2 Error and fraud have been exposed, 
but there is an “unexplored remainder” perplexing 
to the astute psychologist. 

Many people have accepted spiritualism as a 
religious belief, and there is no reason for impeach¬ 
ing their motives, or regarding them as insincere, 
or lacking in intelligence and discrimination, unless 
it can be shown that they are not willing to receive 
light, knowing that it is available. 


3 See Transcendental Physics, by Zollner. .(Colby & Rich, 
Boston.) 


291 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


A “medium” who accepts the Divine Spirit as 
a guide, and will not entertain any other spirit 
without His consent and approval, will begin to 
know what he is about without much delay. There 
is danger in attempting to look into the spirit 
world, without the protection and guidance of 
Almighty God. 

To sympathize with those who are longing for 
clearer light on the burning question, “Does death 
end all?” is appropriate. We are to “prove all 
things and hold fast that which is good.” But 
first, it is best to know whether one is qualified for 
such work. Not until there has been a careful 
consideration of the subject, and an assurance has 
come, which amounts to a divine evidence and con¬ 
viction that we are right, should we accept any 
statements from this source; or look with favor 
upon “communications” supposed to have come 
from persons in the other world. 

Let scientists do what they can with psychic 
phenomena. The spiritual realm is outside of their 
domain. Neither heaven nor hell can be unveiled 
by experiments. 

Spiritualism is regarded by many as purely sub¬ 
jective. “Spirits” are the fanciful creations of the 
292 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


“medium.” The genii invoked at his suggestion, 
who add to the interest of the occasion. The 
phenomena, if genuine, they think, are produced 
by “human magnetism.” And there are reasons for 
believing that this is the psychic force that enables 
a person to move a table or a heavy material body 
by lightly resting the hand upon it, thus, apparently, 
overcoming gravitation; and that audible sounds, 
and other phenomena sometimes associated with 
such action may have the same cause. But what 
is “magnetism” of this kind, and why should the 
spirits of deceased persons be connected with its 
use in this way, if such is the fact? 

The power exerted by a “medium,” or a hypno¬ 
tist, is mental, and when used may enable him to 
operate upon and control material things, or mind 
and matter combined as in a human being. This 
psychic force has not been clearly defined, because 
( so little is known about it. 3 

There is a hidden connection between mind and 

8 Psychic ability to move or control material objects has 
been limited by unknown conditions to such an extent that it 
has seemed to be of no consequence to the casual observer. 
In fact, very few believe that such a force exists, or can be 
used; but it is susceptible to demonstration. 


293 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


matter, which has been overlooked by many emi¬ 
nent philosophers. It is beginning to attract 
attention. It has been unwisely condemned by the 
ignorant and superstitious. Those who have mys¬ 
terious psychic ability are not always conscious of its 
value, or utility. They have generally used it for 
unworthy purposes, or neglected it. 

The ability to act upon and control matter, by 
mental exertion only, is something that has come 
to us from a divine source by inheritance. If it 
were rescued from the mire into which it has fallen, 
and cultivated wisely, it would become an attribute 
of great value, for it is powerful. 

The planets and all the heavenly bodies were 
formed through the exertion of spiritual forces on 
inanimate matter, and all that lives upon them, 
originated in this way. 4 

It is not difficult to see how “spirits” came to 
be associated with psychic phenomena of this kind, 
and regarded by many as the cause of it. Persons 
who were capable of producing these strange effects 
did not understand what was in themselves. Not 

4 As God is a spirit, he must use spiritual or psychic forces 
when acting upon insensate material or the forces of nature. 

294 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


being able to account for what they saw and heard, 
they concluded that it must have a supernatural 
origin. They ascribed it to beings in the other 
world, and supposed that spirits were acting in and 
through them, hence they called themselves ‘‘me¬ 
diums’ J ; and those who advocated their views were 
called “spiritualists.” 

Apparently there were reasons for this theory, 
for they could get the names of those who were 
dead by this process, and some ideas concerning 
another life; but these ideas were, in many instances, 
vague, contradictory, and unreliable. 

The theology of spiritualism (if it has a theology) 
is so voluminous and varied that it comprehends 
every shade of opinion conceivable. It has to do 
with temperament, character, nationality, inclina¬ 
tions, fancies, special revelations, and many other 
things. Its creed is broad enough for any¬ 
body, and conformity to its requirements is not 
difficult. 

It is certain that the same phenomena can be 
exhibited by those who have no faith in spiritual¬ 
ism, and who depend upon themselves for success. 
This fact is now quite generally understood. We 
may, therefore, safely conclude that what is known 


295 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


as “spiritualism” originated in living persons 
endowed by nature with uncommon psychic ability, 
and that it does not necessarily have any connection 
with the other world. 

Whether spiritual beings ever co-operate with 
those in our world, who are using occult mental 
forces, and assist them by suggestions, influence, 
or power of any kind, is an important question, 
and one that cannot be easily answered. Undoubt¬ 
edly we are open to suggestions, that may come 
from the spiritual states both good and evil. The 
possibility of impressions reaching us from this 
source is understood by those who believe that there 
is an invisible world; and they include nearly all 
mankind, both civilized and savage. But in what 
ways can they act, in and through us? What are 
the limitations and possibilities ? And may not 
thoughts from ourselves, or others, in this life, flow 
in, or spring up within us, and seem to come from 
the supernatural realm? The ability to discrimi¬ 
nate, analyze, and identify, what may come into 
the mind, under varied circumstances, and be able 
to demonstrate the fact to others, is not easy to 
find. 

An attempt to communicate with God implies 
296 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


some knowledge of our relation to Him, and a 
belief that we can be kept from interference by 
other spirits who may be opposed to our design, 
and respond for him, or intercept the communica¬ 
tion. Some care, and intelligence, and a consid¬ 
eration of our moral attitude from his point of view 
is known to be essential to success. But when a 
person throws himself open to influences from 
other sources in the spiritual world, and is not 
careful to notice whether his life is right in all 
respects or not, and cordially invites “spirits” to 
take possession of his faculties, and control and 
impress him, and suggest what they choose, and 
faith in their ability is expressed, he need not be 
surprised to find that he can get what seems to be 
a response. How reliable it is, or how much it 
is worth to him, or any one else, or who is the 
author of it, are important questions. The con¬ 
ditions are such that its genuineness is very 
doubtful. 

The psychic phenomena associated with such a 
response may be wonderful; and the “medium” 
who acts for himself, or for others, may have some 
ability as a clairvoyant, or mind-reader; but this 
would not indicate that anything of importance had 


297 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


come from the spiritual world, even if the name of 
a deceased person were connected with it, because 
the conditions are such that no adequate protection 
against misrepresentation and mistakes is afforded. 

To clear the mental environment, and find the 
truth, if any truth can be found in this way, is 
difficult work. 

We are susceptible to impressions that emanate 
from ourselves. They may seem to have another 
source. There are departments in our nature from 
which suggestions may come, and if one has a 
tendency to jump at conclusions, such suggestions 
might be taken for revelations from the spiritual 
world. Thus, a man may become a hot-bed of 
fanaticism and cultivate a rank growth of delusions, 
which he may publish as inspired communications 
and obtain a large following. In this way many 
of the weak and erroneous religious beliefs of the 
world originated. 

A psychologist, or “medium,” who is able to 
produce impressions upon the mind of another, may 
succeed in fastening a thought in the mind of a 
susceptible person in the audience which will be 
taken for a message from the other world, and the 
“medium” may think that it is, not knowing that 
298 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 

it emanated from his own brain. But he can 
“prove” to the satisfaction of many who are present 
that it came from a dead relative, or friend, for 
says he: “Do we not have the name of our deceased 
friend, and notice these remarkable manifestations? 
Are they not miraculous? Are they not the work 
of spirits?” It is the strange phenomena that 
attract attention and seem to demonstrate the 
genuineness of the message; but therein lies a 
fallacy. 

The mental atmosphere of a seance, or company, 
who are looking for communications, or manifes¬ 
tations, from “spirits” is very complex, when it is 
understood that something is expected from human 
beings in the other world. 

The “spirits” may entertain and even amuse the 
audience. They may be able to locate a lost article, 
or prescribe for the sick, and show that their 
counsel is valuable, by reminding the inquirer of 
some things in his history that were unknown to 
any one but himself. This could be accomplished 
by one who has some ability as a clairvoyant, or 
mind-reader, without any assistance from spirits. 

Hopeful predictions and some worthy sentences 
may come as communications. Very little is said 
299 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


about hell that would make it look dark, and 
dreadful, or have a tendency to trouble the con¬ 
science of any one present. Sentimental views of 
heaven are common. The “spirits” are fond of 
music, and can do better sometimes if it is intro¬ 
duced. There is something very human and earthly 
about such efforts; and it will be found by the acute 
and discriminating observer that their quality can 
generally be gauged by the kind of audience present 
on such occasions. The mentality of the entire 
company is represented when it is “en rapport,” 
or in relation to the object before them in such a 
way that their faculties are combined and concen¬ 
trated, and results of a certain kind are expected. 
What comes may be nothing more than a vague 
expression of their combined sentiments and desires. 
This may be accompanied by peculiar manifestations 
that are supposed to be the work of spirits, but 
really are produced by persons present who have 
psychic forces in themselves that make such phe¬ 
nomena possible, when the conditions are suitable, 
whether they are conscious or unconscious of such 
power. 

An interesting experiment is often tried with 
success. An article is hidden in a room where a 
300 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


company is sitting. Some one is brought in who 
does not know where it is, or what it is. He is 
blindfolded and asked to find it. As the attention 
of the entire company is concentrated upon him, 
he will begin to move toward the hidden object, 
and if he is somewhat susceptible to psychic influ¬ 
ences, will find it without difficulty. While moving 
it is noticed that he is controlled by “something,” 
and it is understood that he is really moved by the 
company, as he co-operates with them in the effort . 6 

Communications from “spirits” can be obtained 
in this way, and they may proceed from the same 
source, viz.: the spirits in earthly forms that con¬ 
stitute the audience. No others are necessarily 
involved. 

That unearthly spirits may be present and able 
to make impressions and suggestions cannot be 
denied; for we are all open, more or less, to the 
spiritual world on all occasions, and under all cir¬ 
cumstances; but it is folly to suppose that they are 
responsible for the psychic phenomena developed, or 
any ideas that are worthy of consideration, especially 
if they seem to be heavenly in their origin. These 

8 A mind-reader or clairvoyant may succeed without the 
co-operation of the company. 

301 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


things come from the “medium” or the company 
present, whether they are conscious of it or not. < 

Holy angels act in God, in an exclusive and abso¬ 
lute sense. They do not appear, or communicate, 
unless they have important messages to be delivered 
to chosen persons, whose devotion and loyalty to 
God are well understood, and whose intelligence, 
and discrimination in such matters, cannot be 
doubted by the most judicious people. They have 
no messages of their own; everything they have 
to offer is from a divine source. Such messengers 
have always been able to identify themselves, and 
prove the genuineness of their revelations to the 
entire satisfaction of the chosen witnesses to whom 
they have come. 

How ridiculous to suppose that they would 
entertain or amuse a promiscuous audience, or 
accompany a medium in his travels, and assist him 
in the production of mysterious psychic phenomena, 
or prescribe for his patients as he fell into a trance, 
and uttered or wrote automatically some things for 
their benefit. Nor should we believe that benevolent 
devils, or semi-religious and charitable spirits are 
engaged in such work, because of their interest in 
humanity, or the medium, or for any other reason. 


302 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


Let healers and psychologists and clairvoyants, 
and mediums of all kinds, have credit for what 
they do. If, in some instances, they have helped 
people, it should be acknowledged and their work 
appreciated ; but these things should not be asso¬ 
ciated in an obscure and mysterious way with 
persons in the spiritual states. 

People who enter the other world are examined 
and judged. They must know what they are about 
without unnecessary delay. Decisions are rendered 
as clear light comes. All find that they are either 
good or bad in character or tendencies. If they 
are right, they use their opportunities. If they are 
bad, they sink rapidly into weakness and con¬ 
tempt. They have no interest in people in this life 
that is worthy, and no desire to help or bless 
humanity. They grow worse, and may become 
confirmed and unmitigated fiends, who do nothing 
but suggest evil thought, tempting and ruining 
those who are susceptible to such influences . 6 

The psychic phenomena associated with what is 
called “spiritualism,” and supposed by some to be 
a part of it, are worthy of attention. It is an inter- 


6 See Ch. x. 

303 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


esting study, and has possibilities that will make 
it valuable when it is more perfectly understood. 
It should not be mixed with anything that has to 
do with the other world. If it is, then responses 
will come, apparently from the other world; because 
it is, in a degree, an echo of the mentality of those 
who are experimenting with it. It should, there¬ 
fore, be carefully separated from everything that 
would create misunderstanding. 

Spiritualism, as a religious belief , is exceedingly 
delusive. It may represent almost anything good, 
bad, or indifferent. We need not be surprised to 
find many sincere and intelligent spiritualists whose 
lives are worthy; but there may be a mistake about 
the source of their inspiration and goodness. 

For those who are anxious to know more about 
the spiritual world there is great encouragement. 
The keys can be found. Thirst for such knowledge 
is legitimate and there is unbounded gratification 
for the sincere student who takes the right course; 
but it is not found by those who regard spiritualism 
as a good opening. 

To some it is really dangerous, for in addition 
to the mysterious human elements, which seem, to 
the unsophisticated, to be supernatural, there is a 


304 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


chance for infernal spirits to make impressions and 
suggestions that are misleading, knowing that iden¬ 
tification is very difficult, and that they may be 
credited with some things for which they are not 
responsible, and are incapable of doing. Simula¬ 
tion is common. Fictitious names may be given. 
There is often a tendency to conceal or misrepre¬ 
sent; therefore, very little reliance should be placed 
upon such communications, for their source is 
indefinite. 

There is moral danger for the weak and cred¬ 
ulous. Many good people are deluded and wrecked 
by spiritualism. They feel at first that its methods 
are suspicious and questionable; but they are curious 
and become infatuated by it, and fall into grievous 
errors, because they try to build upon something 
that has no solid foundation. 

The gold-hunter who works in the dark is unfor¬ 
tunate. He cannot know what he is doing. He 
may hear that he is rich, but he is poor indeed if 
he cannot verify such rumors. As the mariner 
approaches an unknown country, dim outlines 
enveloped in mist may be seen. Suddenly the ship 
is in midst of a dense fog, and the chilly atmos¬ 
phere indicates ice and a perilous region. Sound- 
305 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


ings are taken rapidly, and the dismal wail of the 
danger signal is heard. Nothing but the utmost 
caution can prevent disaster, and if anchorage can 
be found the captain waits for clearer weather. 

All Christendom believes that legions of spiritual 
beings inhabit the earth; yet very few have an 
intelligent and realistic conception of the fact. 
Light comes to those who ask for it, and are willing 
to meet the conditions that will enable them to 
receive it, but it must come from a divine Source, 
or evidences of its genuineness and authenticity, 
that are worthy of belief, cannot be found. 

The propinquity of the inconceivable multitudes, 
who have lived and died, whose number, when 
compared with earth’s swarming millions, is as the 
unbounded ocean to a drop, is the more easily 
discerned when trial, cruel as the grave, associated 
with a sublime purpose, has clarified and exalted 
the perceptions. 

Bunyan’s spiritual conflicts, and unjust imprison¬ 
ment, prepared him for his immortal work in which 
there are so many vivid conceptions of things invis¬ 
ible and eternal. Dante’s early disappointment and 
banishment opened the door of hell, and carried 
306 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


him, in vision, to the sublime heights of paradise. 
Plis ideas have interested the world, because he put 
his life into them. They were a poet's conceptions. 
What he has said concerning the other world is not 
so important as what he was as a man and a genius; 
for what he has written enables us to look into 
his mind and feel the influence of his intense and 
exalted nature. 

There are reasons for believing that Joan of Arc, 
the maid of Orleans, was remarkable for her open¬ 
ness to the spiritual world, even in childhood. In 
a vision she saw herself at the head of the armies 
of France, leading them triumphantly to battle. 
Then came years of struggle and suffering. Could 
she tell the vision to the King? How would he 
receive it? What could a girl do on the battle¬ 
field after brave men had failed? At length, as 
she reached womanhood, courage came and an 
unfaltering trust. She explained her mission at 
Court, and was received with favor. She inspired 
confidence. The enemy fled in dismay before her 
furious charge, and were afraid to meet her in 
deadly encounter. The nation rejoiced in her 
success. Intrepid maiden! Foul suspicion, ingrat- 


307 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


itude and cruel martyrdom could not shake her 
constancy. “We are lost,” said the secretary of 
Henry VL, as her life went out. “We have burnt 
a saint.” 

Trance is a mental condition arising- from the 
suspension of .some vital functions, and the exalta¬ 
tion of intuition. In this abnormal state one may 
perceive what the senses cannot apprehend. Such 
knowledge is not always reliable, but it affords 
evidence of superior powers to be developed after 
death. 

Super-sensuous perception is not necessarily a 
miracle of knowledge. It is of many kinds and 
grades, ranging from mere impressions to perpetual 
open vision, from the partial closing of the senses 
to the most profound and death-like sleep. It may 
be produced by a hypnotist, or come at will, or at 
irregular intervals without perceptible reasons. It 
may be caused by disease, or weakness, or come to 
one in the fullness of bodily health and mental 
capacity. 

The trance of St. Peter was regarded by him as 
a fortunate phenomenon, because it was associated 
with a vision that enabled him to open a door for 
the Gospel that would make it available for the 
308 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


whole world. It did not prevent his immediate 
journey to Cesarea, where, with words of wisdom, 
he settled one of the most important questions of 
his times . 7 

The remarkable trance of St. Paul, in which he 
was carried in vision to the Third Heaven, not 
knowing whether he was in the natural body or 
out of it, and heard unspeakable words, did not 
affect his logic unfavorably, or impair the value 
of his celebrated epistles . 8 

Super-sensuous perception may be the vehicle of 
divine revelations, or of truth and error mixed. To 
know the difference between divine illumination 
and exalted intuition, simulations, and erroneous 
impressions from many sources, is not easy even 
for those who rank high among the world’s great 
teachers. 

Truth of this kind should be tested by a con¬ 
sensus of opinion, coming from the most intelligent 
and sincere of all classes. This should be supple¬ 
mented by an evidence and conviction in those who 
think they are able to judge in such matters, which 
has divine approval. Even this sense of approval 
should be tested by a great variety of severe, impar- 


7 Acts x. 


“Acts xxii. 17; and II. Cor. xii. 1-4. 
309 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


tial and discriminating methods, especially by facts 
that are self-evident to the candid and judicious 
observer; for error sometimes lurks under what is 
supposed to have divine support. 

Then that which is called the truth, because it 
has been carefully examined and thoroughly sifted, 
should not be considered infallible, if it is found 
that some of it is still erroneous, and needs revision 
and correction. 

Emanuel Swedenborg’s description of a fire in 
Stockholm, when he was in Gottenburg, three hun¬ 
dred miles away, shows that he had power to 
discern that which is not apparent in this life unless 
trance, a mesmeric state, clairvoyance, or abnormal 
conditions of some kind exist. Clairvoyance of this 
kind has always been rare; but in his case it was 
also associated with exceptional intelligence, culture, 
and moral greatness. 

The extraordinary development of his intuitions, 
which he began to cultivate somewhat late in life, 
led him to conclude that his “spiritual senses” had 
been opened in a miraculous manner. He began 
to be more deeply interested in the Bible, and 
adopted new methods of interpretation. 

Not clearly distinguishing between abnormal or 
310 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


exalted intuitive perception, and special revelations 
from God, he entertained many interesting, but 
delusive, views of the spiritual world. 

Some of the great underlying principles upon 
which he built his system of theology are worthy 
of attention. Those who are interested in his works 
need not necessarily reject that which seems to be 
divinely inspired, for his devotion and faith were 
not without their reward. 

It appears that he did not make an intelligible or 
reasonable distinction between God the Father and 
His Son . 9 

Epileptic fits and spasmodic convulsions threw 
Mohammed into the morbid dreams from which 
the Koran was evolved. This unnatural excite¬ 
ment was followed by a fiery enthusiasm, full of 
fatalism and phantasy. He felt a kind of ecstasy, 
or afflatus, which seemed to be divine. He regarded 
it as such. He was a man of ideas, and remark¬ 
able ambition, and when he declared himself to be 
a prophet, he found followers; hence we have 
Mohammedanism. 

Sublime faith and absolute devotion may be 
connected with the most rank, blind, contagious 


9 See p. 280, Ch. xi. 
3il 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


fanaticism. It is the religious element that makes 
it attractive, disguising the truth. 

Revivals of religion have sometimes been accom¬ 
panied by exhibitions of weakness and extravagance 
that were hard for the thoughtful and devout to 
understand. To distinguish between that which 
emanated from crude, or extremely susceptible 
human nature, under pressure and excitement, and 
that which may have had its source in mysterious 
divine impulses, has been difficult. 

If such conspicuous demonstrations and unique 
phenomena proceed from a spiritual and heavenly 
agency, then all unfavorable comment or restraint 
should be avoided, and these things should be 
cultivated and encouraged. If it is impossible to 
know whether these manifestations are human or 
divine in their origin, and an attempt to explain 
them, or caution the audience, would result in mis¬ 
understanding and interfere with the interests of 
the work, then the less said about them the better. 
But why should heavenly joys and melting raptures 
be associated wdth erratic ways? Why this wild 
excitement and unseemly hilarity? 

What is kno>vn as “the power” in religious 
meetings wffiere intense interest and deep emotion 


312 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 

prevails is still a mystery. Persons suddenly fall 
prostrate and are insensible for a while. Others 
jump, scream, vociferate, or laugh with reckless 
disregard of propriety. 

People who are affected in this way are not 
always able to give reasons for it. The explanation 
made by some is not satisfactory to those who 
have exalted conceptions of God and His methods. 
“We abandon ourselves entirely to the influences 
of the Holy Spirit, and are not responsible for the 
results. These things may be unintelligible and 
repulsive to those who do not understand, and create 
much prejudice; but we believe them to be expres¬ 
sions of divine power.” 

That the manifestations of the Spirit in humanity 
should have the utmost latitude and freedom from 
resistance will be conceded by those who believe 
that he seeks expression through all who meet the 
conditions that make divine union possible. But 
to hold Him responsible for that which is contrary 
to the best ideas of propriety among intelligent and 
sensible people, and teach that “we should be willing 
to become fools for God’s sake, for He may require 
such a sacrifice,” is to make the truth abominable, 
and true religion ridiculous. 


313 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


The manifestations of the Divine Spirit on the 
Day of Pentecost were very unusual, and attracted 
the attention of multitudes, but there was nothing 
in them that would indicate recklessness or extrav¬ 
agance in expression. The disciples felt a powerful 
inspiration, which was noticed by all present, but 
their words were weighty and impressive, and the 
result of their efforts correspondingly important. 

Those who were opposed tried to minify their 
work by claiming that they were slightly intoxicated. 
This, however, they did not state as a fact, but 
“mocking,” said: “These men are full of new 
wine .” 10 

To distinguish between divine manifestations and 
that which is human, but mysterious, has been 
difficult from the beginning. Even in the Apostolic 
Age there was trouble of this kind in the newly 
organized churches. In Corinth there was con¬ 
fusion and misunderstanding. Some of the Chris¬ 
tians in their religious meetings began to speak in 
unknown tongues. They regarded this phenomenon 
as divine and miraculous. They thought they were 
inspired by the Holy Spirit. They were sternly 


10 Acts ii. 
314 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


rebuked by St. Paul. He accused them of “talking 
to the air.” 11 

About A.D. 170, Montanus, of Phrygia, began 
to be in trances, raptures, and ecstasies, in which 
he uttered what were taken to be prophecies. He 
claimed divine inspiration. Pie asserted that he 
was nothing but a medium, having no will or word 
of his own. In the name of the Holy Spirit he 
said: “Behold the man as a lyre, and I sweep over 
him as the plectrum.” Undoubtedly he was sincere, 
but his delusions were many. If he were living 
in this age he might be called a “spiritualist,” 
or possibly a “holy crank.” He certainly was an 
extremist of the most pronounced type. 

The rise of the “Irvingites” in London about 
1830 was associated with mysterious psychic phe¬ 
nomena, which Edward Irving, a Presbyterian 
minister, did not understand. He was an eloquent 
preacher and attracted crowds of hearers; but 
strange and unfortunate things happened to persons 
in his congregations, for which he seems to have 
been responsible and yet unconscious of the fact. 

Mary Campbell, a young Scotch woman, who 
had been earnestly praying for the gift of the Holy 


11 1 . Cor. xiv. 9. 
315 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


Ghost, began to prophesy, and speak with fervor 
in an “unknown tongue.” The same phenomenon 
became manifest in Qther persons. Mr. Irving was 
at first doubtful as to the origin of these “gifts,” 
but he soon owned them to be from God, and 
allowed them exercise in his church, and wrote and 
spoke in their favor. The prophecies (which to 
us, who now dispassionately read them, appear in no¬ 
wise remarkable) were in English. The “tongue” 
which those who uttered it, supposed, for a while, 
to be the living speech of some far-off country, was 
pronounced by philologists to be totally unlike any 
known language. The opinion was speedily adopted 
by believers that the “tongue” was a supernatural 
sign of divine power. Mr. Irving was tried for 
heresy by his church and condemned, but his fol¬ 
lowers gathered around him, and organized what, 
at length, became another sect, known as The 
Catholic Apostolic Church. 

Speaking in an unknown tongue to an audience 
with speaker and hearers under the impression that 
God is trying to edify them is arrant nonsense, 
and worse. It is blasphemous for enlightened 
people to entertain such conceptions of God and 
His work. 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


“Communications” in strange languages have 
been received under the auspices of skilful “me¬ 
diums” when the psychic conditions were favorable. 
The methods by which they were produced seemed, 
also, to be inexplicable and miraculous. This is 
supposed to be proof positive that such writing was 
supernatural, and originated in the other world. 
This need not necessarily be understood, for the 
psychic wonder of its production may have been 
natural, its cause being in the “medium.” The 
ideas could flow in from a variety of human sources, 
interesting to the psychologist, but difficult to 
locate or analyze. 

There is something very remarkable about 
memory and the laws of association that is revealed 
at critical moments in life. 

A person while drowning may review his entire 
history, including the most minute details, cover¬ 
ing a period of forty years or more, in less than five 
minutes. Many authentic instances of this kind 
are on record. 

Coleridge, writing of the mysterious laws of 
memory and the association of ideas, notices a fact 
which he learned while traveling in Germany in 
1798. In a town of Germany a young woman of 

W 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


twenty-five years, who could neither read nor write, 
was suffering with a fever, during which she was 
incessantly talking in Greek, Latin, and Hebrew. 
The case attracted much attention, and many sen¬ 
tences which she uttered were taken down by 
learned persons present. These sentences were 
found to be coherent and intelligible, but having 
little or no connection with each other. Of the 
Hebrew only a small portion could be traced to the 
Bible; the remainder was that form of Hebrew 
which is usually called “Rabbinic/’ 

Ignorant, simple, and harmless, as this young 
woman was known to be, no one suspected any 
deception, and no explanation, for a long time, could 
be given, although inquiries were made in different 
families where she had resided as a servant. At 
last a clue to the mystery was discovered. When 
a child she had listened to a learned man, in whose 
home she was employed, as he read selections from 
his favorite authors in the original languages. It 
seems to have been a case of abnormal recollection. 12 

Great harm has been done by those who have 
tried to make the divine Spirit responsible for their 
follies and idiosyncrasies. 


“See Upham’s “Mental Philosophy” (abridged), Ch. viii. 
3i8 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


Some have thought that “slaying power” (so- 
called) was a sure evidence of His mighty work, 
and have devoutly prayed that the “slain” of the 
Lord might be many. Such prayers have been 
offered when special religious meetings were held 
and good results were expected by those who did 
not realize that such phenomena would be not only 
repulsive but alarming to many thoughtful and 
sincere Christians, and that it could have no vital 
relation to the success of the work. It should not, 
therefore, be cultivated or regarded as a manifesta¬ 
tion of the Spirit. 

A writer on this subject mentions the following 
incident: 13 “A preacher in early Methodism, while 
discoursing on the story of Gideon’s victory, 
shouted, The sword of the Lord and of Gideon.’ 
He then swayed his hand to the right and people 
fell by the score to the ground. He repeated the 
words, szrnyed his hand to the left, and they fell 
in like numbers in that direction.” “There is such 
a thing (he says, referring to this occurrence) as 
the power of the Holy Ghost. While some of its 
manifestations are exceptional and phenomenal, yet, 
it may accompany the ordinary Christian life so 


13 Dr. S. A. Keen, Pentacostal Papers, p. 69. 
319 



LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


that it shall pray, testify, exhort, teach, and live, 
with wonderful effectiveness.” This eminent evan¬ 
gelist and author evidently believed that power 
affecting an audience in this peculiar way was an 
extraordinary expression of divine energy. 

Whereas it is clear to the student of psychology 
that the swaying of the hand accompanied by words 
that fix, and hold the attention, is a method of 
throwing off psychic power known as the “mesmeric 
pass.” The speaker, probably, possessed ability of 
this kind, and the audience was under his control. 

A like phenomenon, but more appropriate, was 
noticed in the midst of a sermon by the late Bishop 
Matthew Simpson, when nearly the whole audience 
arose unconsciously and leaned forward toward the 
speaker, as the interest became intense. 

The Spirit of God must be right in all things. 
He cannot interfere with personal liberty in the 
slightest degree, nor can He withhold the sense of 
His favor from one who trusts Him fully, even 
though such an one may not clearly understand 
divine methods, and claim a heavenly origin for 
that which is human and objectionable. 

There are many things in good people that do 
not bring to them a sense of God’s disapproval, 
3-0 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


because they are not able to discriminate wisely and 
avoid them. Plence, they are quite confident and 
feel that they are right, especially when great and 
wonderful revelations of divine love and glory are 
received. If these manifestations are mixed with 
strange psychic phenomena they believe that all is 
from the same source. And any attempt to con¬ 
vince them that a distinction should be made might 
result in worse error and confusion, and possibly 
the wreckage of faith in any divine manifestations 
that were unusual. 

For this reason many eminent and judicious 
teachers in the churches have been silent concerning 
these mysterious things, or have expressed them¬ 
selves indefinitely. In most instances they have 
confessed their inability to make distinctions that 
would be generally understood, and, therefore, have 
been careful not to condemn that which did not 
appear to conflict with fervent devotion and intense 
loyalty to God. They have been bothered with 
“wild fire,” which they did not see how to extinguish 
without great danger to vital Christianity. 

To know how to make a distinction under vary¬ 
ing circumstances and conditions without doing any 
harm, and yet to encourage and stimulate every- 
321 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


thing in human nature that is good and heavenly, 
while expecting divine manifestations of a most 
interesting, vivid, and powerful kind, is very impor¬ 
tant. Therefore, anything that is supposed to be an 
expression of divine power, or favor, in devotional 
meetings or evangelistic services that is not in har¬ 
mony with what we ought to expect from a divine 
Source, should not be regarded as such, or even 
tolerated. 

Divine power is distinguished by the moral and 
spiritual changes it produces in character. The 
evidences are superhuman love, heavenly joy, knowl¬ 
edge of sins forgiven, soundness of mind, and 
strength under trial. It does not exclude rapture, 
ecstasy, and remarkable demonstrations of mental 
and physical energy. It glorifies true manhood and 
womanhood, and is the opposite of all that involves 
weakness, excess, extravagance of manner, crudity, 
and absurdity. 

The point of danger has been connected with an 
important condition very essential to the seeker of 
divine power, known as “entire consecration.” 
This should not be defined or understood so as to 
convey the impression that thoughtfulness and 
responsibility for himself on the part of the seeker 
322 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 

and recipient of such gifts is not of much conse¬ 
quence. 

The person who regards himself as simply an 
“instrument” in the hands of God, needs clearer 
light. This was the mistake of Montanus, and his 
adherents, and modern Montanists are not uncom¬ 
mon. 

That which makes us desirable to God is not 
simply uncompromising loyalty. Certainly this 
should be apparent; but He would, also, notice the 
expression and development of freedom of thought 
and opinion, and all that constitutes personality and 
individuality. Thus a person has the honor of 
being a friend rather than a “medium” to be operated 
upon. He who makes himself a medium of this 
kind, and does not find success in his work as a 
teacher of the truth, among the intelligent and 
influential, should not ascribe his failure to a want 
of appreciation on their part. 

Acting in God, and with Him, is something very 
different from being acted upon by Him, for it 
means intelligent co-operation. He who takes this 
course will, in time, be able to understand himself 
and know the difference between psychic phenomena 
and divine manifestations. If he has psychic ability 
3 2 3 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


that is of any value he will discover it, and learn 
how to use it with advantage. 

“Divine healing” must also furnish evidence that 
it is divine; if not, it may be produced by the psychic 
energy of the healer only, which is not to be 
despised if it is effective. 

The best way to test divine healing is to try it 
in cases that have been abandoned by competent 
physicians, and pronounced by them absolutely 
incurable, or beyond the hope of recovery. Then 
the healer should do nothing with the patient until 
he has the consent of all the friends concerned, 
whether they have faith in his methods or not. If 
he succeeds under such conditions he will command 
the respect and attention of good judges. 

This was the method of Christ and His disciples. 
The fact, too, that they could raise the dead proved 
that their work was divine, to the satisfaction of 
all sensible and impartial witnesses. They were 
not, therefore, held responsible for the lives of those 
who might have been cured by medical practitioners, 
if they had been called in time, or given a fair 
opportunity. 

God’s ability to cure diseases is as great as ever, 
but He does not act unless it is expedient, and it 
324 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


is for Him to determine the conditions that make 
miracles advisable. Doubtless many cases of divine 
and miraculous healing have been noticed in this 
age by unimpeachable witnesses, and greater things 
are to be revealed; for many are carefully looking 
into the conditions that make such work possible 
and are able to meet them. 

Ignoring a disease, or calling it something else, 
may be helpful in some instances, but there is still a 
number of maladies and casualities that will not 
yield to such treatment. 

Some say that they have found relief by touching 
the bones of a departed saint, or taking bread pills, 
which the doctor called a “valuable medicine. ,, If 
they feel better why try to prove that they are 
deceived? There is some virtue in an idea when 
people think so. 

Inexplicable forces emanating from human per¬ 
sonality have been deified by those whose reverence 
would not allow a careful investigation with their 
utility in view. 

Personality is a mental atmosphere which envelops 
every human being. Its strength and quality is the 
measure of influence. It is what is sometimes called 
presence. It may be very penetrating and pervasive. 
325 


LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 


A person with keen intuitions and susceptible nature 
can detect the presence of another, without any 
evidences from the senses, and will turn around 
to see who it is. 

This potent energy, the very essence of being, 
has been strangely misunderstood. The forces of 
nature have been studied with astonishing success, 
while this has been confined to the narrow province 
of psychometry, or neglected as doubtful and 
unimportant. Its possibilities are amazing. This 
fact is becoming more apparent to men of science, 
who are now beginning to study its laws and limita¬ 
tions. There is an increasing demand for valuable 
literature on this subject. Important discoveries are 
soon to be made that will transcend anything that 
we have imagined. 

For years men looked with eager eyes on the 
rushing, roaring rapids of Niagara. Could this 
tremendous force be harnessed to the wheels of 
industry? Skillful engineers found that the strong¬ 
est machinery was shattered by the fury of this 
king of cataracts. Some thought this wonder of 
the world should not be used for practical purposes. 
At last objections were overcome. Electricity was 
wedded to gravitation. Immense power was made 
326 


PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 


available without affecting the scenery unfavorably. 
The mighty flood, seemingly undiminished, still 
pours its thundering tons of water into the awful 
abyss, while rainbows gather in eternal beauty. 

The line between the natural and the supernatural 
is receding. Doctrines and creeds are modified and 
adjusted when they are found to be unreasonable 
and obsolete. Superior criticism with stern hand 
examines the sacred records. The great journals 
and periodicals of the day bring their treasures of 
universal knowledge. The world is looking for 
facts, and will not be satisfied without them. The 
age is practical. Therefore, the advantages of the 
hour are great. Tennyson’s “Fifty Years of 
Europe” must soon be as “a cycle of Cathay.” 


327 




















































































/ 


- • 



























- 


























































INDEX 


OF 

LIFE IN TWO WORLDS 

PAGE 

Abyss of eternity,. 6 

Adam and agriculture,.191 

Amusements and the churches,.263 

Annihilation,.12 

Angels ascending and descending,.59, 92 

Angels, mystery of existence,.74 

Angels and ethnology,.81 

Angels interviewed,.88 

Angels, humanity of,.77, 270 

Animals not immortal,. 8 

Apocalypse,.163 

Atmosphere, The,.150 

Babylon,.148, 162, 170 

Bible, revision of,.. . 66, 68 

Bottomless pit,.67, 70 

Bridging a chasm,.80 

Bride wreathed with flowers,.241 

Burial, mysterious,.144 

Consecration, intelligent, . 322 

Control, under, ..87 

Christ before his birth,.277 

Creation, costly,.149 

Creation, purpose of,.55 

Creation out of nothing,.6, 271 

Curse, a divine,.190 



























INDEX 


PAGE 

Darkness in the other world,.12 

Death, the second,.68 

Death, necessity of,.124 

Demoniacal possession,.86 

Depths and heights,.234 

Destructiveness,. 45 

Devils, benevolent,.302 

Earth a fragment,.152 

Egypt after the deluge,.82 

En rapport, ..300 

Expression, super-mundane,.102 

Falling stars,.178 

Failing nine days,.96 

Fire,.28 

Ghost of Samuel,.181 

Glory and fanaticism,.312 

Globe a cemetery,.126 

God singular and plural,.280 

God’s house,.54 

God, eternity of,. 3 

Good'ness, involuntary,.n 

Gravitation, pull of,.39 

Ham, .83 

Healing, divine or psychic,.324 

Heaven and hell, where ?.48, SO 

Heavenly efflorescence,.145 

Heavenly apparel,.134, 147 

Heavens and earth destroyed (?).157 

Heaven, social privileges in,.252 

Heaven, and diversions in,.262 

Heaven, literature of,. 269 

Heaven, rest in,.39 

Heaven, art in,.267 



































INDEX 


PAGE 

Hell not organized,.232 

Hell-fire,.33 

Hell and mercy,.188 

Hell, burial of,.. 

Hell and “strong language,”.67 

Hell, torment in,.223 

Hell, probation in (?),.237 

Hell and ministers,.66 

Hope,.•.46 

“Holy recklessness,”.115 

Howling wilderness, a,. 3 

Hymnology,.64 

Idea, birth of,.97 

Immortality.16 

Incorporeal body, the,.10, 39 

Incapacity, infernal,.71 

Incorporeal, temple,.99 

Indigenous men,.84 

Infinite day,.40 

Infants in the other world,.56 

Infernal evolution,.242 

Infernal wreck,.223 

Inspired' expression,.Ill 

Irving, Edward,.315 

Irresponsible people,.256 

Joan of Arc,.307 

Keys of the other world,.304 

Lens, a wonderful,.29 

Light and darkness,.38 

Life in two worlds,.165 

Med'iumship, possibilities of,.286 

Membrana tympani, the,. 23 


































INDEX 


PAGE 

Miller, William,.116 

Montanus,.31 5 

Monstrosity, abominable,. 45 

Mosquitos,.198 

Mundane bones,.126 

Mythology, modern,.94 

Nature, Permanence of,.172 

Nature, walls of,.119 

Natural evils, origin of,.208 

Passions intensified,.31 

Parthian arrows,.176 

Paul in two worlds,.182 

Paradise,.182 

Perception, celestial,.104 

Poison,.189 

Planetary mystery,.22 

Property hereafter,. 31 

Psychic phenomena,.285 

Pyramid of Cheops,.16 

Re-incarnation,.136 

Relics, potential,.325 

Roses bloom again,.30 

Resurrection,.140 

Satan in heaven,...93 

Seance, a,.299 

Sea, no more,.186 

Sea, tyranny of,.119 

“Serpent,” seed of,.. 79, 211 

Shakespeare,.98 

“Slaying power,”. 319 

Sleep in heaven,.138 

Snakes of Ireland,.207 

Snow-line,.14 



































INDEX 


PAGE 

Solar system in embryo,.154 

Solar system, permanent,.172 

Spiritualism,.285 

Spiritual world, where?.47 

Spiritualism in the home,.289 

Spiritual body, evolution of,.137 

Spiritual world', foundation of,.30 

Spiritualism, theology of,.295 

Study, the greatest,.275 

Suggestion, power of,.17, 261 

Sunrise and sunset,.40 

Swedenborg,.96, 310 

Telepathic knowledge,.41 

Thought in a tree,.17 

Thoughts unclothed,.107 

Trance,.308 

Translation and transfiguration,.123 

Transmigration of souls,.86 

Unexplored remainders,.200 

Up and down,.51, 60 

Vesuvius,.173 

Vegeto-animal organisms,. 8 

Vital graveyards,.180 

Vital principle, the,. 7 

Virus, infernal,.43, 246 

Vision, open,.121 

Weather, bad',.>.195 

Whisper, lightest,.24 

Worlds, cognate,.49 

World, end of,.148 

Words, three thousand,.. . 101 


























































































































. 













































































































































































































































> 


Sfck 14 1908 | 




Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proce 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: August 2005 

PreservationTechnologii 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATI 

111 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 
























































































































